|
HTML rendering created 2024-06-26 by Michael Kerrisk, author of The Linux Programming Interface. For details of in-depth Linux/UNIX system programming training courses that I teach, look here. Hosting by jambit GmbH. |
|
HG(1) Mercurial Manual HG(1)
hg - Mercurial source code management system
hg command [option]... [argument]...
The hg command provides a command line interface to the Mercurial
system.
files...
indicates one or more filename or relative path filenames;
see File Name Patterns for information on pattern matching
path indicates a path on the local machine
revision
indicates a changeset which can be specified as a
changeset revision number, a tag, or a unique substring of
the changeset hash value
repository path
either the pathname of a local repository or the URI of a
remote repository.
-R,--repository <REPO>
repository root directory or name of overlay bundle file
--cwd <DIR>
change working directory
-y, --noninteractive
do not prompt, automatically pick the first choice for all
prompts
-q, --quiet
suppress output
-v, --verbose
enable additional output
--color <TYPE>
when to colorize (boolean, always, auto, never, or debug)
--config <CONFIG[+]>
set/override config option (use 'section.name=value')
--debug
enable debugging output
--debugger
start debugger
--encoding <ENCODE>
set the charset encoding (default: UTF-8)
--encodingmode <MODE>
set the charset encoding mode (default: strict)
--traceback
always print a traceback on exception
--time time how long the command takes
--profile
print command execution profile
--version
output version information and exit
-h, --help
display help and exit
--hidden
consider hidden changesets
--pager <TYPE>
when to paginate (boolean, always, auto, or never)
(default: auto)
[+] marked option can be specified multiple times
Repository creation
clone
make a copy of an existing repository:
hg clone [OPTION]... SOURCE [DEST]
Create a copy of an existing repository in a new directory.
If no destination directory name is specified, it defaults to the
basename of the source.
The location of the source is added to the new repository's
.hg/hgrc file, as the default to be used for future pulls.
Only local paths and ssh:// URLs are supported as destinations.
For ssh:// destinations, no working directory or .hg/hgrc will be
created on the remote side.
If the source repository has a bookmark called '@' set, that
revision will be checked out in the new repository by default.
To check out a particular version, use -u/--update, or
-U/--noupdate to create a clone with no working directory.
To pull only a subset of changesets, specify one or more
revisions identifiers with -r/--rev or branches with -b/--branch.
The resulting clone will contain only the specified changesets
and their ancestors. These options (or 'clone src#rev dest')
imply --pull, even for local source repositories.
In normal clone mode, the remote normalizes repository data into
a common exchange format and the receiving end translates this
data into its local storage format. --stream activates a
different clone mode that essentially copies repository files
from the remote with minimal data processing. This significantly
reduces the CPU cost of a clone both remotely and locally.
However, it often increases the transferred data size by 30-40%.
This can result in substantially faster clones where I/O
throughput is plentiful, especially for larger repositories. A
side-effect of --stream clones is that storage settings and
requirements on the remote are applied locally: a modern client
may inherit legacy or inefficient storage used by the remote or a
legacy Mercurial client may not be able to clone from a modern
Mercurial remote.
Note Specifying a tag will include the tagged changeset but not
the changeset containing the tag.
For efficiency, hardlinks are used for cloning whenever the
source and destination are on the same filesystem (note this
applies only to the repository data, not to the working
directory). Some filesystems, such as AFS, implement hardlinking
incorrectly, but do not report errors. In these cases, use the
--pull option to avoid hardlinking.
Mercurial will update the working directory to the first
applicable revision from this list:
a. null if -U or the source repository has no changesets
b. if -u . and the source repository is local, the first parent
of the source repository's working directory
c. the changeset specified with -u (if a branch name, this means
the latest head of that branch)
d. the changeset specified with -r
e. the tipmost head specified with -b
f. the tipmost head specified with the url#branch source syntax
g. the revision marked with the '@' bookmark, if present
h. the tipmost head of the default branch
i. tip
When cloning from servers that support it, Mercurial may fetch
pre-generated data from a server-advertised URL or inline from
the same stream. When this is done, hooks operating on incoming
changesets and changegroups may fire more than once, once for
each pre-generated bundle and as well as for any additional
remaining data. In addition, if an error occurs, the repository
may be rolled back to a partial clone. This behavior may change
in future releases. See hg help -e clonebundles for more.
Examples:
• clone a remote repository to a new directory named hg/:
hg clone https://www.mercurial-scm.org/repo/hg/
• create a lightweight local clone:
hg clone project/ project-feature/
• clone from an absolute path on an ssh server (note
double-slash):
hg clone ssh://user@server//home/projects/alpha/
• do a streaming clone while checking out a specified version:
hg clone --stream http://server/repo -u 1.5
• create a repository without changesets after a particular
revision:
hg clone -r 04e544 experimental/ good/
• clone (and track) a particular named branch:
hg clone https://www.mercurial-scm.org/repo/hg/#stable
See hg help urls for details on specifying URLs.
Returns 0 on success.
Options:
-U, --noupdate
the clone will include an empty working directory (only a
repository)
-u,--updaterev <REV>
revision, tag, or branch to check out
-r,--rev <REV[+]>
do not clone everything, but include this changeset and
its ancestors
-b,--branch <BRANCH[+]>
do not clone everything, but include this branch's
changesets and their ancestors
--pull use pull protocol to copy metadata
--uncompressed
an alias to --stream (DEPRECATED)
--stream
clone with minimal data processing
-e,--ssh <CMD>
specify ssh command to use
--remotecmd <CMD>
specify hg command to run on the remote side
--insecure
do not verify server certificate (ignoring web.cacerts
config)
[+] marked option can be specified multiple times
init
create a new repository in the given directory:
hg init [-e CMD] [--remotecmd CMD] [DEST]
Initialize a new repository in the given directory. If the given
directory does not exist, it will be created.
If no directory is given, the current directory is used.
It is possible to specify an ssh:// URL as the destination. See
hg help urls for more information.
Returns 0 on success.
Options:
-e,--ssh <CMD>
specify ssh command to use
--remotecmd <CMD>
specify hg command to run on the remote side
--insecure
do not verify server certificate (ignoring web.cacerts
config)
Remote repository management
incoming
show new changesets found in source:
hg incoming [-p] [-n] [-M] [-f] [-r REV]... [--bundle FILENAME] [SOURCE]
Show new changesets found in the specified path/URL or the
default pull location. These are the changesets that would have
been pulled by hg pull at the time you issued this command.
See pull for valid source format details.
With -B/--bookmarks, the result of bookmark comparison between
local and remote repositories is displayed. With -v/--verbose,
status is also displayed for each bookmark like below:
BM1 01234567890a added
BM2 1234567890ab advanced
BM3 234567890abc diverged
BM4 34567890abcd changed
The action taken locally when pulling depends on the status of
each bookmark:
added
pull will create it
advanced
pull will update it
diverged
pull will create a divergent bookmark
changed
result depends on remote changesets
From the point of view of pulling behavior, bookmark existing
only in the remote repository are treated as added, even if it is
in fact locally deleted.
For remote repository, using --bundle avoids downloading the
changesets twice if the incoming is followed by a pull.
Examples:
• show incoming changes with patches and full description:
hg incoming -vp
• show incoming changes excluding merges, store a bundle:
hg in -vpM --bundle incoming.hg
hg pull incoming.hg
• briefly list changes inside a bundle:
hg in changes.hg -T "{desc|firstline}\n"
Returns 0 if there are incoming changes, 1 otherwise.
Options:
-f, --force
run even if remote repository is unrelated
-n, --newest-first
show newest record first
--bundle <FILE>
file to store the bundles into
-r,--rev <REV[+]>
a remote changeset intended to be added
-B, --bookmarks
compare bookmarks
-b,--branch <BRANCH[+]>
a specific branch you would like to pull
-p, --patch
show patch
-g, --git
use git extended diff format
-l,--limit <NUM>
limit number of changes displayed
-M, --no-merges
do not show merges
--stat output diffstat-style summary of changes
-G, --graph
show the revision DAG
--style <STYLE>
display using template map file (DEPRECATED)
-T,--template <TEMPLATE>
display with template
-e,--ssh <CMD>
specify ssh command to use
--remotecmd <CMD>
specify hg command to run on the remote side
--insecure
do not verify server certificate (ignoring web.cacerts
config)
-S, --subrepos
recurse into subrepositories
[+] marked option can be specified multiple times
aliases: in
outgoing
show changesets not found in the destination:
hg outgoing [-M] [-p] [-n] [-f] [-r REV]... [DEST]...
Show changesets not found in the specified destination repository
or the default push location. These are the changesets that would
be pushed if a push was requested.
See pull for details of valid destination formats.
With -B/--bookmarks, the result of bookmark comparison between
local and remote repositories is displayed. With -v/--verbose,
status is also displayed for each bookmark like below:
BM1 01234567890a added
BM2 deleted
BM3 234567890abc advanced
BM4 34567890abcd diverged
BM5 4567890abcde changed
The action taken when pushing depends on the status of each
bookmark:
added
push with -B will create it
deleted
push with -B will delete it
advanced
push will update it
diverged
push with -B will update it
changed
push with -B will update it
From the point of view of pushing behavior, bookmarks existing
only in the remote repository are treated as deleted, even if it
is in fact added remotely.
Returns 0 if there are outgoing changes, 1 otherwise.
Options:
-f, --force
run even when the destination is unrelated
-r,--rev <REV[+]>
a changeset intended to be included in the destination
-n, --newest-first
show newest record first
-B, --bookmarks
compare bookmarks
-b,--branch <BRANCH[+]>
a specific branch you would like to push
-p, --patch
show patch
-g, --git
use git extended diff format
-l,--limit <NUM>
limit number of changes displayed
-M, --no-merges
do not show merges
--stat output diffstat-style summary of changes
-G, --graph
show the revision DAG
--style <STYLE>
display using template map file (DEPRECATED)
-T,--template <TEMPLATE>
display with template
-e,--ssh <CMD>
specify ssh command to use
--remotecmd <CMD>
specify hg command to run on the remote side
--insecure
do not verify server certificate (ignoring web.cacerts
config)
-S, --subrepos
recurse into subrepositories
[+] marked option can be specified multiple times
aliases: out
paths
show aliases for remote repositories:
hg paths [NAME]
Show definition of symbolic path name NAME. If no name is given,
show definition of all available names.
Option -q/--quiet suppresses all output when searching for NAME
and shows only the path names when listing all definitions.
Path names are defined in the [paths] section of your
configuration file and in /etc/mercurial/hgrc. If run inside a
repository, .hg/hgrc is used, too.
The path names default and default-push have a special meaning.
When performing a push or pull operation, they are used as
fallbacks if no location is specified on the command-line. When
default-push is set, it will be used for push and default will be
used for pull; otherwise default is used as the fallback for
both. When cloning a repository, the clone source is written as
default in .hg/hgrc.
Note default and default-push apply to all inbound (e.g. hg
incoming) and outbound (e.g. hg outgoing, hg email and hg
bundle) operations.
See hg help urls for more information.
Template:
The following keywords are supported. See also hg help templates.
name String. Symbolic name of the path alias.
pushurl
String. URL for push operations.
url String. URL or directory path for the other operations.
Returns 0 on success.
Options:
-T,--template <TEMPLATE>
display with template
pull
pull changes from the specified source:
hg pull [-u] [-f] [-r REV]... [-e CMD] [--remotecmd CMD] [SOURCE]...
Pull changes from a remote repository to a local one.
This finds all changes from the repository at the specified path
or URL and adds them to a local repository (the current one
unless -R is specified). By default, this does not update the
copy of the project in the working directory.
When cloning from servers that support it, Mercurial may fetch
pre-generated data. When this is done, hooks operating on
incoming changesets and changegroups may fire more than once,
once for each pre-generated bundle and as well as for any
additional remaining data. See hg help -e clonebundles for more.
Use hg incoming if you want to see what would have been added by
a pull at the time you issued this command. If you then decide to
add those changes to the repository, you should use hg pull -r X
where X is the last changeset listed by hg incoming.
If SOURCE is omitted, the 'default' path will be used. See hg
help urls for more information.
If multiple sources are specified, they will be pulled
sequentially as if the command was run multiple time. If --update
is specify and the command will stop at the first failed
--update.
Specifying bookmark as . is equivalent to specifying the active
bookmark's name.
Returns 0 on success, 1 if an update had unresolved files.
Options:
-u, --update
update to new branch head if new descendants were pulled
-f, --force
run even when remote repository is unrelated
--confirm
confirm pull before applying changes
-r,--rev <REV[+]>
a remote changeset intended to be added
-B,--bookmark <BOOKMARK[+]>
bookmark to pull
-b,--branch <BRANCH[+]>
a specific branch you would like to pull
-e,--ssh <CMD>
specify ssh command to use
--remotecmd <CMD>
specify hg command to run on the remote side
--insecure
do not verify server certificate (ignoring web.cacerts
config)
[+] marked option can be specified multiple times
push
push changes to the specified destination:
hg push [-f] [-r REV]... [-e CMD] [--remotecmd CMD] [DEST]...
Push changesets from the local repository to the specified
destination.
This operation is symmetrical to pull: it is identical to a pull
in the destination repository from the current one.
By default, push will not allow creation of new heads at the
destination, since multiple heads would make it unclear which
head to use. In this situation, it is recommended to pull and
merge before pushing.
Use --new-branch if you want to allow push to create a new named
branch that is not present at the destination. This allows you to
only create a new branch without forcing other changes.
Note Extra care should be taken with the -f/--force option,
which will push all new heads on all branches, an action
which will almost always cause confusion for
collaborators.
If -r/--rev is used, the specified revision and all its ancestors
will be pushed to the remote repository.
If -B/--bookmark is used, the specified bookmarked revision, its
ancestors, and the bookmark will be pushed to the remote
repository. Specifying . is equivalent to specifying the active
bookmark's name. Use the --all-bookmarks option for pushing all
current bookmarks.
Please see hg help urls for important details about ssh:// URLs.
If DESTINATION is omitted, a default path will be used.
When passed multiple destinations, push will process them one
after the other, but stop should an error occur.
The --pushvars option sends strings to the server that become
environment variables prepended with HG_USERVAR_. For example,
--pushvars ENABLE_FEATURE=true, provides the server side hooks
with HG_USERVAR_ENABLE_FEATURE=true as part of their environment.
pushvars can provide for user-overridable hooks as well as set
debug levels. One example is having a hook that blocks commits
containing conflict markers, but enables the user to override the
hook if the file is using conflict markers for testing purposes
or the file format has strings that look like conflict markers.
By default, servers will ignore --pushvars. To enable it add the
following to your configuration file:
[push]
pushvars.server = true
Returns 0 if push was successful, 1 if nothing to push.
Options:
-f, --force
force push
-r,--rev <REV[+]>
a changeset intended to be included in the destination
-B,--bookmark <BOOKMARK[+]>
bookmark to push
--all-bookmarks
push all bookmarks (EXPERIMENTAL)
-b,--branch <BRANCH[+]>
a specific branch you would like to push
--new-branch
allow pushing a new branch
--pushvars <VALUE[+]>
variables that can be sent to server (ADVANCED)
--publish
push the changeset as public (EXPERIMENTAL)
-e,--ssh <CMD>
specify ssh command to use
--remotecmd <CMD>
specify hg command to run on the remote side
--insecure
do not verify server certificate (ignoring web.cacerts
config)
[+] marked option can be specified multiple times
serve
start stand-alone webserver:
hg serve [OPTION]...
Start a local HTTP repository browser and pull server. You can
use this for ad-hoc sharing and browsing of repositories. It is
recommended to use a real web server to serve a repository for
longer periods of time.
Please note that the server does not implement access control.
This means that, by default, anybody can read from the server and
nobody can write to it by default. Set the web.allow-push option
to * to allow everybody to push to the server. You should use a
real web server if you need to authenticate users.
By default, the server logs accesses to stdout and errors to
stderr. Use the -A/--accesslog and -E/--errorlog options to log
to files.
To have the server choose a free port number to listen on,
specify a port number of 0; in this case, the server will print
the port number it uses.
Returns 0 on success.
Options:
-A,--accesslog <FILE>
name of access log file to write to
-d, --daemon
run server in background
--daemon-postexec <VALUE[+]>
used internally by daemon mode
-E,--errorlog <FILE>
name of error log file to write to
-p,--port <PORT>
port to listen on (default: 8000)
-a,--address <ADDR>
address to listen on (default: all interfaces)
--prefix <PREFIX>
prefix path to serve from (default: server root)
-n,--name <NAME>
name to show in web pages (default: working directory)
--web-conf <FILE>
name of the hgweb config file (see 'hg help hgweb')
--webdir-conf <FILE>
name of the hgweb config file (DEPRECATED)
--pid-file <FILE>
name of file to write process ID to
--stdio
for remote clients (ADVANCED)
--cmdserver <MODE>
for remote clients (ADVANCED)
-t,--templates <TEMPLATE>
web templates to use
--style <STYLE>
template style to use
-6, --ipv6
use IPv6 in addition to IPv4
--certificate <FILE>
SSL certificate file
--print-url
start and print only the URL
-S, --subrepos
recurse into subrepositories
[+] marked option can be specified multiple times
Change creation
commit
commit the specified files or all outstanding changes:
hg commit [OPTION]... [FILE]...
Commit changes to the given files into the repository. Unlike a
centralized SCM, this operation is a local operation. See hg push
for a way to actively distribute your changes.
If a list of files is omitted, all changes reported by hg status
will be committed.
If you are committing the result of a merge, do not provide any
filenames or -I/-X filters.
If no commit message is specified, Mercurial starts your
configured editor where you can enter a message. In case your
commit fails, you will find a backup of your message in
.hg/last-message.txt.
The --close-branch flag can be used to mark the current branch
head closed. When all heads of a branch are closed, the branch
will be considered closed and no longer listed.
The --amend flag can be used to amend the parent of the working
directory with a new commit that contains the changes in the
parent in addition to those currently reported by hg status, if
there are any. The old commit is stored in a backup bundle in
.hg/strip-backup (see hg help bundle and hg help unbundle on how
to restore it).
Message, user and date are taken from the amended commit unless
specified. When a message isn't specified on the command line,
the editor will open with the message of the amended commit.
It is not possible to amend public changesets (see hg help phases
) or changesets that have children.
See hg help dates for a list of formats valid for -d/--date.
Returns 0 on success, 1 if nothing changed.
Examples:
• commit all files ending in .py:
hg commit --include "set:**.py"
• commit all non-binary files:
hg commit --exclude "set:binary()"
• amend the current commit and set the date to now:
hg commit --amend --date now
Options:
-A, --addremove
mark new/missing files as added/removed before committing
--close-branch
mark a branch head as closed
--amend
amend the parent of the working directory
-s, --secret
use the secret phase for committing
-e, --edit
invoke editor on commit messages
--force-close-branch
forcibly close branch from a non-head changeset (ADVANCED)
-i, --interactive
use interactive mode
-I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
include names matching the given patterns
-X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
exclude names matching the given patterns
-m,--message <TEXT>
use text as commit message
-l,--logfile <FILE>
read commit message from file
-d,--date <DATE>
record the specified date as commit date
-u,--user <USER>
record the specified user as committer
-S, --subrepos
recurse into subrepositories
[+] marked option can be specified multiple times
aliases: ci
Change manipulation
abort
abort an unfinished operation (EXPERIMENTAL):
hg abort
Aborts a multistep operation like graft, histedit, rebase, merge,
and unshelve if they are in an unfinished state.
use --dry-run/-n to dry run the command.
Options:
-n, --dry-run
do not perform actions, just print output
backout
reverse effect of earlier changeset:
hg backout [OPTION]... [-r] REV
Prepare a new changeset with the effect of REV undone in the
current working directory. If no conflicts were encountered, it
will be committed immediately.
If REV is the parent of the working directory, then this new
changeset is committed automatically (unless --no-commit is
specified).
Note hg backout cannot be used to fix either an unwanted or
incorrect merge.
Examples:
• Reverse the effect of the parent of the working directory.
This backout will be committed immediately:
hg backout -r .
• Reverse the effect of previous bad revision 23:
hg backout -r 23
• Reverse the effect of previous bad revision 23 and leave
changes uncommitted:
hg backout -r 23 --no-commit
hg commit -m "Backout revision 23"
By default, the pending changeset will have one parent,
maintaining a linear history. With --merge, the pending changeset
will instead have two parents: the old parent of the working
directory and a new child of REV that simply undoes REV.
Before version 1.7, the behavior without --merge was equivalent
to specifying --merge followed by hg update --clean . to cancel
the merge and leave the child of REV as a head to be merged
separately.
See hg help dates for a list of formats valid for -d/--date.
See hg help revert for a way to restore files to the state of
another revision.
Returns 0 on success, 1 if nothing to backout or there are
unresolved files.
Options:
--merge
merge with old dirstate parent after backout
--commit
commit if no conflicts were encountered (DEPRECATED)
--no-commit
do not commit
--parent <REV>
parent to choose when backing out merge (DEPRECATED)
-r,--rev <REV>
revision to backout
-e, --edit
invoke editor on commit messages
-t,--tool <TOOL>
specify merge tool
-I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
include names matching the given patterns
-X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
exclude names matching the given patterns
-m,--message <TEXT>
use text as commit message
-l,--logfile <FILE>
read commit message from file
-d,--date <DATE>
record the specified date as commit date
-u,--user <USER>
record the specified user as committer
[+] marked option can be specified multiple times
continue
resumes an interrupted operation (EXPERIMENTAL):
hg continue
Finishes a multistep operation like graft, histedit, rebase,
merge, and unshelve if they are in an interrupted state.
use --dry-run/-n to dry run the command.
Options:
-n, --dry-run
do not perform actions, just print output
graft
copy changes from other branches onto the current branch:
hg graft [OPTION]... [-r REV]... REV...
This command uses Mercurial's merge logic to copy individual
changes from other branches without merging branches in the
history graph. This is sometimes known as 'backporting' or
'cherry-picking'. By default, graft will copy user, date, and
description from the source changesets.
Changesets that are ancestors of the current revision, that have
already been grafted, or that are merges will be skipped.
If --log is specified, log messages will have a comment appended
of the form:
(grafted from CHANGESETHASH)
If --force is specified, revisions will be grafted even if they
are already ancestors of, or have been grafted to, the
destination. This is useful when the revisions have since been
backed out.
If a graft merge results in conflicts, the graft process is
interrupted so that the current merge can be manually resolved.
Once all conflicts are addressed, the graft process can be
continued with the -c/--continue option.
The -c/--continue option reapplies all the earlier options.
The --base option exposes more of how graft internally uses merge
with a custom base revision. --base can be used to specify
another ancestor than the first and only parent.
The command:
hg graft -r 345 --base 234
is thus pretty much the same as:
hg diff --from 234 --to 345 | hg import
but using merge to resolve conflicts and track moved files.
The result of a merge can thus be backported as a single commit
by specifying one of the merge parents as base, and thus
effectively grafting the changes from the other side.
It is also possible to collapse multiple changesets and clean up
history by specifying another ancestor as base, much like rebase
--collapse --keep.
The commit message can be tweaked after the fact using commit
--amend .
For using non-ancestors as the base to backout changes, see the
backout command and the hidden --parent option.
Examples:
• copy a single change to the stable branch and edit its
description:
hg update stable
hg graft --edit 9393
• graft a range of changesets with one exception, updating dates:
hg graft -D "2085::2093 and not 2091"
• continue a graft after resolving conflicts:
hg graft -c
• show the source of a grafted changeset:
hg log --debug -r .
• show revisions sorted by date:
hg log -r "sort(all(), date)"
• backport the result of a merge as a single commit:
hg graft -r 123 --base 123^
• land a feature branch as one changeset:
hg up -cr default
hg graft -r featureX --base "ancestor('featureX', 'default')"
See hg help revisions for more about specifying revisions.
Returns 0 on successful completion, 1 if there are unresolved
files.
Options:
-r,--rev <REV[+]>
revisions to graft
--base <REV>
base revision when doing the graft merge (ADVANCED)
-c, --continue
resume interrupted graft
--stop stop interrupted graft
--abort
abort interrupted graft
-e, --edit
invoke editor on commit messages
--log append graft info to log message
--no-commit
don't commit, just apply the changes in working directory
-f, --force
force graft
-D, --currentdate
record the current date as commit date
-U, --currentuser
record the current user as committer
-d,--date <DATE>
record the specified date as commit date
-u,--user <USER>
record the specified user as committer
-t,--tool <TOOL>
specify merge tool
-n, --dry-run
do not perform actions, just print output
[+] marked option can be specified multiple times
merge
merge another revision into working directory:
hg merge [-P] [[-r] REV]
The current working directory is updated with all changes made in
the requested revision since the last common predecessor
revision.
Files that changed between either parent are marked as changed
for the next commit and a commit must be performed before any
further updates to the repository are allowed. The next commit
will have two parents.
--tool can be used to specify the merge tool used for file
merges. It overrides the HGMERGE environment variable and your
configuration files. See hg help merge-tools for options.
If no revision is specified, the working directory's parent is a
head revision, and the current branch contains exactly one other
head, the other head is merged with by default. Otherwise, an
explicit revision with which to merge must be provided.
See hg help resolve for information on handling file conflicts.
To undo an uncommitted merge, use hg merge --abort which will
check out a clean copy of the original merge parent, losing all
changes.
Returns 0 on success, 1 if there are unresolved files.
Options:
-f, --force
force a merge including outstanding changes (DEPRECATED)
-r,--rev <REV>
revision to merge
-P, --preview
review revisions to merge (no merge is performed)
--abort
abort the ongoing merge
-t,--tool <TOOL>
specify merge tool
Change organization
bookmarks
create a new bookmark or list existing bookmarks:
hg bookmarks [OPTIONS]... [NAME]...
Bookmarks are labels on changesets to help track lines of
development. Bookmarks are unversioned and can be moved, renamed
and deleted. Deleting or moving a bookmark has no effect on the
associated changesets.
Creating or updating to a bookmark causes it to be marked as
'active'. The active bookmark is indicated with a '*'. When a
commit is made, the active bookmark will advance to the new
commit. A plain hg update will also advance an active bookmark,
if possible. Updating away from a bookmark will cause it to be
deactivated.
Bookmarks can be pushed and pulled between repositories (see hg
help push and hg help pull). If a shared bookmark has diverged, a
new 'divergent bookmark' of the form 'name@path' will be created.
Using hg merge will resolve the divergence.
Specifying bookmark as '.' to -m/-d/-l options is equivalent to
specifying the active bookmark's name.
A bookmark named '@' has the special property that hg clone will
check it out by default if it exists.
Template:
The following keywords are supported in addition to the common
template keywords and functions such as {bookmark}. See also hg
help templates.
active Boolean. True if the bookmark is active.
Examples:
• create an active bookmark for a new line of development:
hg book new-feature
• create an inactive bookmark as a place marker:
hg book -i reviewed
• create an inactive bookmark on another changeset:
hg book -r .^ tested
• rename bookmark turkey to dinner:
hg book -m turkey dinner
• move the '@' bookmark from another branch:
hg book -f @
• print only the active bookmark name:
hg book -ql .
Options:
-f, --force
force
-r,--rev <REV>
revision for bookmark action
-d, --delete
delete a given bookmark
-m,--rename <OLD>
rename a given bookmark
-i, --inactive
mark a bookmark inactive
-l, --list
list existing bookmarks
-T,--template <TEMPLATE>
display with template
aliases: bookmark
branch
set or show the current branch name:
hg branch [-fC] [NAME]
Note Branch names are permanent and global. Use hg bookmark to
create a light-weight bookmark instead. See hg help
glossary for more information about named branches and
bookmarks.
With no argument, show the current branch name. With one
argument, set the working directory branch name (the branch will
not exist in the repository until the next commit). Standard
practice recommends that primary development take place on the
'default' branch.
Unless -f/--force is specified, branch will not let you set a
branch name that already exists.
Use -C/--clean to reset the working directory branch to that of
the parent of the working directory, negating a previous branch
change.
Use the command hg update to switch to an existing branch. Use hg
commit --close-branch to mark this branch head as closed. When
all heads of a branch are closed, the branch will be considered
closed.
Returns 0 on success.
Options:
-f, --force
set branch name even if it shadows an existing branch
-C, --clean
reset branch name to parent branch name
-r,--rev <VALUE[+]>
change branches of the given revs (EXPERIMENTAL)
[+] marked option can be specified multiple times
branches
list repository named branches:
hg branches [-c]
List the repository's named branches, indicating which ones are
inactive. If -c/--closed is specified, also list branches which
have been marked closed (see hg commit --close-branch).
Use the command hg update to switch to an existing branch.
Template:
The following keywords are supported in addition to the common
template keywords and functions such as {branch}. See also hg
help templates.
active Boolean. True if the branch is active.
closed Boolean. True if the branch is closed.
current
Boolean. True if it is the current branch.
Returns 0.
Options:
-a, --active
show only branches that have unmerged heads (DEPRECATED)
-c, --closed
show normal and closed branches
-r,--rev <VALUE[+]>
show branch name(s) of the given rev
-T,--template <TEMPLATE>
display with template
[+] marked option can be specified multiple times
phase
set or show the current phase name:
hg phase [-p|-d|-s] [-f] [-r] [REV...]
With no argument, show the phase name of the current revision(s).
With one of -p/--public, -d/--draft or -s/--secret, change the
phase value of the specified revisions.
Unless -f/--force is specified, hg phase won't move changesets
from a lower phase to a higher phase. Phases are ordered as
follows:
public < draft < secret
Returns 0 on success, 1 if some phases could not be changed.
(For more information about the phases concept, see hg help
phases.)
Options:
-p, --public
set changeset phase to public
-d, --draft
set changeset phase to draft
-s, --secret
set changeset phase to secret
-f, --force
allow to move boundary backward
-r,--rev <REV[+]>
target revision
[+] marked option can be specified multiple times
tag
add one or more tags for the current or given revision:
hg tag [-f] [-l] [-m TEXT] [-d DATE] [-u USER] [-r REV] NAME...
Name a particular revision using <name>.
Tags are used to name particular revisions of the repository and
are very useful to compare different revisions, to go back to
significant earlier versions or to mark branch points as
releases, etc. Changing an existing tag is normally disallowed;
use -f/--force to override.
If no revision is given, the parent of the working directory is
used.
To facilitate version control, distribution, and merging of tags,
they are stored as a file named ".hgtags" which is managed
similarly to other project files and can be hand-edited if
necessary. This also means that tagging creates a new commit. The
file ".hg/localtags" is used for local tags (not shared among
repositories).
Tag commits are usually made at the head of a branch. If the
parent of the working directory is not a branch head, hg tag
aborts; use -f/--force to force the tag commit to be based on a
non-head changeset.
See hg help dates for a list of formats valid for -d/--date.
Since tag names have priority over branch names during revision
lookup, using an existing branch name as a tag name is
discouraged.
Returns 0 on success.
Options:
-f, --force
force tag
-l, --local
make the tag local
-r,--rev <REV>
revision to tag
--remove
remove a tag
-e, --edit
invoke editor on commit messages
-m,--message <TEXT>
use text as commit message
-d,--date <DATE>
record the specified date as commit date
-u,--user <USER>
record the specified user as committer
tags
list repository tags:
hg tags
This lists both regular and local tags. When the -v/--verbose
switch is used, a third column "local" is printed for local tags.
When the -q/--quiet switch is used, only the tag name is printed.
Template:
The following keywords are supported in addition to the common
template keywords and functions such as {tag}. See also hg help
templates.
type String. local for local tags.
Returns 0 on success.
Options:
-T,--template <TEMPLATE>
display with template
File content management
annotate
show changeset information by line for each file:
hg annotate [-r REV] [-f] [-a] [-u] [-d] [-n] [-c] [-l] FILE...
List changes in files, showing the revision id responsible for
each line.
This command is useful for discovering when a change was made and
by whom.
If you include --file, --user, or --date, the revision number is
suppressed unless you also include --number.
Without the -a/--text option, annotate will avoid processing
files it detects as binary. With -a, annotate will annotate the
file anyway, although the results will probably be neither useful
nor desirable.
Template:
The following keywords are supported in addition to the common
template keywords and functions. See also hg help templates.
lines List of lines with annotation data.
path String. Repository-absolute path of the specified file.
And each entry of {lines} provides the following sub-keywords in
addition to {date}, {node}, {rev}, {user}, etc.
line String. Line content.
lineno Integer. Line number at that revision.
path String. Repository-absolute path of the file at that
revision.
See hg help templates.operators for the list expansion syntax.
Returns 0 on success.
Options:
-r,--rev <REV>
annotate the specified revision
--follow
follow copies/renames and list the filename (DEPRECATED)
--no-follow
don't follow copies and renames
-a, --text
treat all files as text
-u, --user
list the author (long with -v)
-f, --file
list the filename
-d, --date
list the date (short with -q)
-n, --number
list the revision number (default)
-c, --changeset
list the changeset
-l, --line-number
show line number at the first appearance
--skip <REV[+]>
revset to not display (EXPERIMENTAL)
-w, --ignore-all-space
ignore white space when comparing lines
-b, --ignore-space-change
ignore changes in the amount of white space
-B, --ignore-blank-lines
ignore changes whose lines are all blank
-Z, --ignore-space-at-eol
ignore changes in whitespace at EOL
-I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
include names matching the given patterns
-X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
exclude names matching the given patterns
-T,--template <TEMPLATE>
display with template
[+] marked option can be specified multiple times
aliases: blame
cat
output the current or given revision of files:
hg cat [OPTION]... FILE...
Print the specified files as they were at the given revision. If
no revision is given, the parent of the working directory is
used.
Output may be to a file, in which case the name of the file is
given using a template string. See hg help templates. In addition
to the common template keywords, the following formatting rules
are supported:
%%
literal "%" character
%s
basename of file being printed
%d
dirname of file being printed, or '.' if in repository
root
%p
root-relative path name of file being printed
%H
changeset hash (40 hexadecimal digits)
%R
changeset revision number
%h
short-form changeset hash (12 hexadecimal digits)
%r
zero-padded changeset revision number
%b
basename of the exporting repository
\
literal "" character
Template:
The following keywords are supported in addition to the common
template keywords and functions. See also hg help templates.
data String. File content.
path String. Repository-absolute path of the file.
Returns 0 on success.
Options:
-o,--output <FORMAT>
print output to file with formatted name
-r,--rev <REV>
print the given revision
--decode
apply any matching decode filter
-I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
include names matching the given patterns
-X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
exclude names matching the given patterns
-T,--template <TEMPLATE>
display with template
[+] marked option can be specified multiple times
copy
mark files as copied for the next commit:
hg copy [OPTION]... (SOURCE... DEST | --forget DEST...)
Mark dest as having copies of source files. If dest is a
directory, copies are put in that directory. If dest is a file,
the source must be a single file.
By default, this command copies the contents of files as they
exist in the working directory. If invoked with -A/--after, the
operation is recorded, but no copying is performed.
To undo marking a destination file as copied, use --forget. With
that option, all given (positional) arguments are unmarked as
copies. The destination file(s) will be left in place (still
tracked). Note that hg copy --forget behaves the same way as hg
rename --forget.
This command takes effect with the next commit by default.
Returns 0 on success, 1 if errors are encountered.
Options:
--forget
unmark a destination file as copied
-A, --after
record a copy that has already occurred
--at-rev <REV>
(un)mark copies in the given revision (EXPERIMENTAL)
-f, --force
forcibly copy over an existing managed file
-I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
include names matching the given patterns
-X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
exclude names matching the given patterns
-n, --dry-run
do not perform actions, just print output
[+] marked option can be specified multiple times
aliases: cp
diff
diff repository (or selected files):
hg diff [OPTION]... ([-c REV] | [--from REV1] [--to REV2]) [FILE]...
Show differences between revisions for the specified files.
Differences between files are shown using the unified diff
format.
Note hg diff may generate unexpected results for merges, as it
will default to comparing against the working directory's
first parent changeset if no revisions are specified. To
diff against the conflict regions, you can use --config
diff.merge=yes.
By default, the working directory files are compared to its first
parent. To see the differences from another revision, use --from.
To see the difference to another revision, use --to. For example,
hg diff --from .^ will show the differences from the working
copy's grandparent to the working copy, hg diff --to . will show
the diff from the working copy to its parent (i.e. the reverse of
the default), and hg diff --from 1.0 --to 1.2 will show the diff
between those two revisions.
Alternatively you can specify -c/--change with a revision to see
the changes in that changeset relative to its first parent (i.e.
hg diff -c 42 is equivalent to hg diff --from 42^ --to 42)
Without the -a/--text option, diff will avoid generating diffs of
files it detects as binary. With -a, diff will generate a diff
anyway, probably with undesirable results.
Use the -g/--git option to generate diffs in the git extended
diff format. For more information, read hg help diffs.
Examples:
• compare a file in the current working directory to its parent:
hg diff foo.c
• compare two historical versions of a directory, with rename
info:
hg diff --git --from 1.0 --to 1.2 lib/
• get change stats relative to the last change on some date:
hg diff --stat --from "date('may 2')"
• diff all newly-added files that contain a keyword:
hg diff "set:added() and grep(GNU)"
• compare a revision and its parents:
hg diff -c 9353 # compare against first parent
hg diff --from 9353^ --to 9353 # same using revset syntax
hg diff --from 9353^2 --to 9353 # compare against the second parent
Returns 0 on success.
Options:
-r,--rev <REV[+]>
revision (DEPRECATED)
--from <REV1>
revision to diff from
--to <REV2>
revision to diff to
-c,--change <REV>
change made by revision
-a, --text
treat all files as text
-g, --git
use git extended diff format (DEFAULT: diff.git)
--binary
generate binary diffs in git mode (default)
--nodates
omit dates from diff headers
--noprefix
omit a/ and b/ prefixes from filenames
-p, --show-function
show which function each change is in (DEFAULT:
diff.showfunc)
--reverse
produce a diff that undoes the changes
-w, --ignore-all-space
ignore white space when comparing lines
-b, --ignore-space-change
ignore changes in the amount of white space
-B, --ignore-blank-lines
ignore changes whose lines are all blank
-Z, --ignore-space-at-eol
ignore changes in whitespace at EOL
-U,--unified <NUM>
number of lines of context to show
--stat output diffstat-style summary of changes
--root <DIR>
produce diffs relative to subdirectory
-I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
include names matching the given patterns
-X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
exclude names matching the given patterns
-S, --subrepos
recurse into subrepositories
[+] marked option can be specified multiple times
grep
search for a pattern in specified files:
hg grep [--diff] [OPTION]... PATTERN [FILE]...
Search the working directory or revision history for a regular
expression in the specified files for the entire repository.
By default, grep searches the repository files in the working
directory and prints the files where it finds a match. To specify
historical revisions instead of the working directory, use the
--rev flag.
To search instead historical revision differences that contains a
change in match status ("-" for a match that becomes a non-match,
or "+" for a non-match that becomes a match), use the --diff
flag.
PATTERN can be any Python (roughly Perl-compatible) regular
expression.
If no FILEs are specified and the --rev flag isn't supplied, all
files in the working directory are searched. When using the --rev
flag and specifying FILEs, use the --follow argument to also
follow the specified FILEs across renames and copies.
Template:
The following keywords are supported in addition to the common
template keywords and functions. See also hg help templates.
change String. Character denoting insertion + or removal -.
Available if --diff is specified.
lineno Integer. Line number of the match.
path String. Repository-absolute path of the file.
texts List of text chunks.
And each entry of {texts} provides the following sub-keywords.
matched
Boolean. True if the chunk matches the specified pattern.
text String. Chunk content.
See hg help templates.operators for the list expansion syntax.
Returns 0 if a match is found, 1 otherwise.
Options:
-0, --print0
end fields with NUL
--all an alias to --diff (DEPRECATED)
--diff search revision differences for when the pattern was added
or removed
-a, --text
treat all files as text
-f, --follow
follow changeset history, or file history across copies
and renames
-i, --ignore-case
ignore case when matching
-l, --files-with-matches
print only filenames and revisions that match
-n, --line-number
print matching line numbers
-r,--rev <REV[+]>
search files changed within revision range
--all-files
include all files in the changeset while grepping
(DEPRECATED)
-u, --user
list the author (long with -v)
-d, --date
list the date (short with -q)
-T,--template <TEMPLATE>
display with template
-I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
include names matching the given patterns
-X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
exclude names matching the given patterns
[+] marked option can be specified multiple times
Change navigation
bisect
subdivision search of changesets:
hg bisect [-gbsr] [-U] [-c CMD] [REV]
This command helps to find changesets which introduce problems.
To use, mark the earliest changeset you know exhibits the problem
as bad, then mark the latest changeset which is free from the
problem as good. Bisect will update your working directory to a
revision for testing (unless the -U/--noupdate option is
specified). Once you have performed tests, mark the working
directory as good or bad, and bisect will either update to
another candidate changeset or announce that it has found the bad
revision.
As a shortcut, you can also use the revision argument to mark a
revision as good or bad without checking it out first.
If you supply a command, it will be used for automatic bisection.
The environment variable HG_NODE will contain the ID of the
changeset being tested. The exit status of the command will be
used to mark revisions as good or bad: status 0 means good, 125
means to skip the revision, 127 (command not found) will abort
the bisection, and any other non-zero exit status means the
revision is bad.
Some examples:
• start a bisection with known bad revision 34, and good revision
12:
hg bisect --bad 34
hg bisect --good 12
• advance the current bisection by marking current revision as
good or bad:
hg bisect --good
hg bisect --bad
• mark the current revision, or a known revision, to be skipped
(e.g. if that revision is not usable because of another issue):
hg bisect --skip
hg bisect --skip 23
• skip all revisions that do not touch directories foo or bar:
hg bisect --skip "!( file('path:foo') & file('path:bar') )"
• forget the current bisection:
hg bisect --reset
• use 'make && make tests' to automatically find the first broken
revision:
hg bisect --reset
hg bisect --bad 34
hg bisect --good 12
hg bisect --command "make && make tests"
• see all changesets whose states are already known in the
current bisection:
hg log -r "bisect(pruned)"
• see the changeset currently being bisected (especially useful
if running with -U/--noupdate):
hg log -r "bisect(current)"
• see all changesets that took part in the current bisection:
hg log -r "bisect(range)"
• you can even get a nice graph:
hg log --graph -r "bisect(range)"
See hg help revisions.bisect for more about the bisect()
predicate.
Returns 0 on success.
Options:
-r, --reset
reset bisect state
-g, --good
mark changeset good
-b, --bad
mark changeset bad
-s, --skip
skip testing changeset
-e, --extend
extend the bisect range
-c,--command <CMD>
use command to check changeset state
-U, --noupdate
do not update to target
heads
show branch heads:
hg heads [-ct] [-r STARTREV] [REV]...
With no arguments, show all open branch heads in the repository.
Branch heads are changesets that have no descendants on the same
branch. They are where development generally takes place and are
the usual targets for update and merge operations.
If one or more REVs are given, only open branch heads on the
branches associated with the specified changesets are shown. This
means that you can use hg heads . to see the heads on the
currently checked-out branch.
If -c/--closed is specified, also show branch heads marked closed
(see hg commit --close-branch).
If STARTREV is specified, only those heads that are descendants
of STARTREV will be displayed.
If -t/--topo is specified, named branch mechanics will be ignored
and only topological heads (changesets with no children) will be
shown.
Returns 0 if matching heads are found, 1 if not.
Options:
-r,--rev <STARTREV>
show only heads which are descendants of STARTREV
-t, --topo
show topological heads only
-a, --active
show active branchheads only (DEPRECATED)
-c, --closed
show normal and closed branch heads
--style <STYLE>
display using template map file (DEPRECATED)
-T,--template <TEMPLATE>
display with template
identify
identify the working directory or specified revision:
hg identify [-nibtB] [-r REV] [SOURCE]
Print a summary identifying the repository state at REV using one
or two parent hash identifiers, followed by a "+" if the working
directory has uncommitted changes, the branch name (if not
default), a list of tags, and a list of bookmarks.
When REV is not given, print a summary of the current state of
the repository including the working directory. Specify -r. to
get information of the working directory parent without scanning
uncommitted changes.
Specifying a path to a repository root or Mercurial bundle will
cause lookup to operate on that repository/bundle.
Template:
The following keywords are supported in addition to the common
template keywords and functions. See also hg help templates.
dirty String. Character + denoting if the working directory has
uncommitted changes.
id String. One or two nodes, optionally followed by +.
parents
List of strings. Parent nodes of the changeset.
Examples:
• generate a build identifier for the working directory:
hg id --id > build-id.dat
• find the revision corresponding to a tag:
hg id -n -r 1.3
• check the most recent revision of a remote repository:
hg id -r tip https://www.mercurial-scm.org/repo/hg/
See hg log for generating more information about specific
revisions, including full hash identifiers.
Returns 0 if successful.
Options:
-r,--rev <REV>
identify the specified revision
-n, --num
show local revision number
-i, --id
show global revision id
-b, --branch
show branch
-t, --tags
show tags
-B, --bookmarks
show bookmarks
-e,--ssh <CMD>
specify ssh command to use
--remotecmd <CMD>
specify hg command to run on the remote side
--insecure
do not verify server certificate (ignoring web.cacerts
config)
-T,--template <TEMPLATE>
display with template
aliases: id
log
show revision history of entire repository or files:
hg log [OPTION]... [FILE]
Print the revision history of the specified files or the entire
project.
If no revision range is specified, the default is tip:0 unless
--follow is set.
File history is shown without following rename or copy history of
files. Use -f/--follow with a filename to follow history across
renames and copies. --follow without a filename will only show
ancestors of the starting revisions. The starting revisions can
be specified by -r/--rev, which default to the working directory
parent.
By default this command prints revision number and changeset id,
tags, non-trivial parents, user, date and time, and a summary for
each commit. When the -v/--verbose switch is used, the list of
changed files and full commit message are shown.
With --graph the revisions are shown as an ASCII art DAG with the
most recent changeset at the top. 'o' is a changeset, '@' is a
working directory parent, '%' is a changeset involved in an
unresolved merge conflict, '_' closes a branch, 'x' is obsolete,
'*' is unstable, and '+' represents a fork where the changeset
from the lines below is a parent of the 'o' merge on the same
line. Paths in the DAG are represented with '|', '/' and so
forth. ':' in place of a '|' indicates one or more revisions in a
path are omitted.
Use -L/--line-range FILE,M:N options to follow the history of
lines from M to N in FILE. With -p/--patch only diff hunks
affecting specified line range will be shown. This option
requires --follow; it can be specified multiple times. Currently,
this option is not compatible with --graph. This option is
experimental.
Note hg log --patch may generate unexpected diff output for
merge changesets, as it will only compare the merge
changeset against its first parent. Also, only files
different from BOTH parents will appear in files:.
Note For performance reasons, hg log FILE may omit duplicate
changes made on branches and will not show removals or
mode changes. To see all such changes, use the --removed
switch.
Note The history resulting from -L/--line-range options depends
on diff options; for instance if white-spaces are ignored,
respective changes with only white-spaces in specified
line range will not be listed.
Some examples:
• changesets with full descriptions and file lists:
hg log -v
• changesets ancestral to the working directory:
hg log -f
• last 10 commits on the current branch:
hg log -l 10 -b .
• changesets showing all modifications of a file, including
removals:
hg log --removed file.c
• all changesets that touch a directory, with diffs, excluding
merges:
hg log -Mp lib/
• all revision numbers that match a keyword:
hg log -k bug --template "{rev}\n"
• the full hash identifier of the working directory parent:
hg log -r . --template "{node}\n"
• list available log templates:
hg log -T list
• check if a given changeset is included in a tagged release:
hg log -r "a21ccf and ancestor(1.9)"
• find all changesets by some user in a date range:
hg log -k alice -d "may 2008 to jul 2008"
• summary of all changesets after the last tag:
hg log -r "last(tagged())::" --template "{desc|firstline}\n"
• changesets touching lines 13 to 23 for file.c:
hg log -L file.c,13:23
• changesets touching lines 13 to 23 for file.c and lines 2 to 6
of main.c with patch:
hg log -L file.c,13:23 -L main.c,2:6 -p
See hg help dates for a list of formats valid for -d/--date.
See hg help revisions for more about specifying and ordering
revisions.
See hg help templates for more about pre-packaged styles and
specifying custom templates. The default template used by the log
command can be customized via the command-templates.log
configuration setting.
Returns 0 on success.
Options:
-f, --follow
follow changeset history, or file history across copies
and renames
--follow-first
only follow the first parent of merge changesets
(DEPRECATED)
-d,--date <DATE>
show revisions matching date spec
-C, --copies
show copied files
-k,--keyword <TEXT[+]>
do case-insensitive search for a given text
-r,--rev <REV[+]>
revisions to select or follow from
-L,--line-range <FILE,RANGE[+]>
follow line range of specified file (EXPERIMENTAL)
--removed
include revisions where files were removed
-m, --only-merges
show only merges (DEPRECATED) (use -r "merge()" instead)
-u,--user <USER[+]>
revisions committed by user
--only-branch <BRANCH[+]>
show only changesets within the given named branch
(DEPRECATED)
-b,--branch <BRANCH[+]>
show changesets within the given named branch
-B,--bookmark <BOOKMARK[+]>
show changesets within the given bookmark
-P,--prune <REV[+]>
do not display revision or any of its ancestors
-p, --patch
show patch
-g, --git
use git extended diff format
-l,--limit <NUM>
limit number of changes displayed
-M, --no-merges
do not show merges
--stat output diffstat-style summary of changes
-G, --graph
show the revision DAG
--style <STYLE>
display using template map file (DEPRECATED)
-T,--template <TEMPLATE>
display with template
-I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
include names matching the given patterns
-X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
exclude names matching the given patterns
[+] marked option can be specified multiple times
aliases: history
parents
show the parents of the working directory or revision
(DEPRECATED):
hg parents [-r REV] [FILE]
Print the working directory's parent revisions. If a revision is
given via -r/--rev, the parent of that revision will be printed.
If a file argument is given, the revision in which the file was
last changed (before the working directory revision or the
argument to --rev if given) is printed.
This command is equivalent to:
hg log -r "p1()+p2()" or
hg log -r "p1(REV)+p2(REV)" or
hg log -r "max(::p1() and file(FILE))+max(::p2() and file(FILE))" or
hg log -r "max(::p1(REV) and file(FILE))+max(::p2(REV) and file(FILE))"
See hg summary and hg help revsets for related information.
Returns 0 on success.
Options:
-r,--rev <REV>
show parents of the specified revision
--style <STYLE>
display using template map file (DEPRECATED)
-T,--template <TEMPLATE>
display with template
tip
show the tip revision (DEPRECATED):
hg tip [-p] [-g]
The tip revision (usually just called the tip) is the changeset
most recently added to the repository (and therefore the most
recently changed head).
If you have just made a commit, that commit will be the tip. If
you have just pulled changes from another repository, the tip of
that repository becomes the current tip. The "tip" tag is special
and cannot be renamed or assigned to a different changeset.
This command is deprecated, please use hg heads instead.
Returns 0 on success.
Options:
-p, --patch
show patch
-g, --git
use git extended diff format
--style <STYLE>
display using template map file (DEPRECATED)
-T,--template <TEMPLATE>
display with template
Working directory management
add
add the specified files on the next commit:
hg add [OPTION]... [FILE]...
Schedule files to be version controlled and added to the
repository.
The files will be added to the repository at the next commit. To
undo an add before that, see hg forget.
If no names are given, add all files to the repository (except
files matching .hgignore).
Examples:
• New (unknown) files are added automatically by hg add:
$ ls
foo.c
$ hg status
? foo.c
$ hg add
adding foo.c
$ hg status
A foo.c
• Specific files to be added can be specified:
$ ls
bar.c foo.c
$ hg status
? bar.c
? foo.c
$ hg add bar.c
$ hg status
A bar.c
? foo.c
Returns 0 if all files are successfully added.
Options:
-I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
include names matching the given patterns
-X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
exclude names matching the given patterns
-S, --subrepos
recurse into subrepositories
-n, --dry-run
do not perform actions, just print output
[+] marked option can be specified multiple times
addremove
add all new files, delete all missing files:
hg addremove [OPTION]... [FILE]...
Add all new files and remove all missing files from the
repository.
Unless names are given, new files are ignored if they match any
of the patterns in .hgignore. As with add, these changes take
effect at the next commit.
Use the -s/--similarity option to detect renamed files. This
option takes a percentage between 0 (disabled) and 100 (files
must be identical) as its parameter. With a parameter greater
than 0, this compares every removed file with every added file
and records those similar enough as renames. Detecting renamed
files this way can be expensive. After using this option, hg
status -C can be used to check which files were identified as
moved or renamed. If not specified, -s/--similarity defaults to
100 and only renames of identical files are detected.
Examples:
• A number of files (bar.c and foo.c) are new, while foobar.c
has been removed (without using hg remove) from the
repository:
$ ls
bar.c foo.c
$ hg status
! foobar.c
? bar.c
? foo.c
$ hg addremove
adding bar.c
adding foo.c
removing foobar.c
$ hg status
A bar.c
A foo.c
R foobar.c
• A file foobar.c was moved to foo.c without using hg rename.
Afterwards, it was edited slightly:
$ ls
foo.c
$ hg status
! foobar.c
? foo.c
$ hg addremove --similarity 90
removing foobar.c
adding foo.c
recording removal of foobar.c as rename to foo.c (94% similar)
$ hg status -C
A foo.c
foobar.c
R foobar.c
Returns 0 if all files are successfully added.
Options:
-s,--similarity <SIMILARITY>
guess renamed files by similarity (0<=s<=100)
-S, --subrepos
recurse into subrepositories
-I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
include names matching the given patterns
-X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
exclude names matching the given patterns
-n, --dry-run
do not perform actions, just print output
[+] marked option can be specified multiple times
files
list tracked files:
hg files [OPTION]... [FILE]...
Print files under Mercurial control in the working directory or
specified revision for given files (excluding removed files).
Files can be specified as filenames or filesets.
If no files are given to match, this command prints the names of
all files under Mercurial control.
Template:
The following keywords are supported in addition to the common
template keywords and functions. See also hg help templates.
flags String. Character denoting file's symlink and executable
bits.
path String. Repository-absolute path of the file.
size Integer. Size of the file in bytes.
Examples:
• list all files under the current directory:
hg files .
• shows sizes and flags for current revision:
hg files -vr .
• list all files named README:
hg files -I "**/README"
• list all binary files:
hg files "set:binary()"
• find files containing a regular expression:
hg files "set:grep('bob')"
• search tracked file contents with xargs and grep:
hg files -0 | xargs -0 grep foo
See hg help patterns and hg help filesets for more information on
specifying file patterns.
Returns 0 if a match is found, 1 otherwise.
Options:
-r,--rev <REV>
search the repository as it is in REV
-0, --print0
end filenames with NUL, for use with xargs
-I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
include names matching the given patterns
-X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
exclude names matching the given patterns
-T,--template <TEMPLATE>
display with template
-S, --subrepos
recurse into subrepositories
[+] marked option can be specified multiple times
forget
forget the specified files on the next commit:
hg forget [OPTION]... FILE...
Mark the specified files so they will no longer be tracked after
the next commit.
This only removes files from the current branch, not from the
entire project history, and it does not delete them from the
working directory.
To delete the file from the working directory, see hg remove.
To undo a forget before the next commit, see hg add.
Examples:
• forget newly-added binary files:
hg forget "set:added() and binary()"
• forget files that would be excluded by .hgignore:
hg forget "set:hgignore()"
Returns 0 on success.
Options:
-i, --interactive
use interactive mode
-I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
include names matching the given patterns
-X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
exclude names matching the given patterns
-n, --dry-run
do not perform actions, just print output
[+] marked option can be specified multiple times
locate
locate files matching specific patterns (DEPRECATED):
hg locate [OPTION]... [PATTERN]...
Print files under Mercurial control in the working directory
whose names match the given patterns.
By default, this command searches all directories in the working
directory. To search just the current directory and its
subdirectories, use "--include .".
If no patterns are given to match, this command prints the names
of all files under Mercurial control in the working directory.
If you want to feed the output of this command into the "xargs"
command, use the -0 option to both this command and "xargs". This
will avoid the problem of "xargs" treating single filenames that
contain whitespace as multiple filenames.
See hg help files for a more versatile command.
Returns 0 if a match is found, 1 otherwise.
Options:
-r,--rev <REV>
search the repository as it is in REV
-0, --print0
end filenames with NUL, for use with xargs
-f, --fullpath
print complete paths from the filesystem root
-I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
include names matching the given patterns
-X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
exclude names matching the given patterns
[+] marked option can be specified multiple times
purge
removes files not tracked by Mercurial:
hg purge [OPTION]... [DIR]...
Delete files not known to Mercurial. This is useful to test local
and uncommitted changes in an otherwise-clean source tree.
This means that purge will delete the following by default:
• Unknown files: files marked with "?" by hg status
• Empty directories: in fact Mercurial ignores directories unless
they contain files under source control management
But it will leave untouched:
• Modified and unmodified tracked files
• Ignored files (unless -i or --all is specified)
• New files added to the repository (with hg add)
The --files and --dirs options can be used to direct purge to
delete only files, only directories, or both. If neither option
is given, both will be deleted.
If directories are given on the command line, only files in these
directories are considered.
Be careful with purge, as you could irreversibly delete some
files you forgot to add to the repository. If you only want to
print the list of files that this program would delete, use the
--print option.
Options:
-a, --abort-on-err
abort if an error occurs
--all purge ignored files too
-i, --ignored
purge only ignored files
--dirs purge empty directories
--files
purge files
-p, --print
print filenames instead of deleting them
-0, --print0
end filenames with NUL, for use with xargs (implies
-p/--print)
--confirm
ask before permanently deleting files
-I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
include names matching the given patterns
-X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
exclude names matching the given patterns
[+] marked option can be specified multiple times
aliases: clean
remove
remove the specified files on the next commit:
hg remove [OPTION]... FILE...
Schedule the indicated files for removal from the current branch.
This command schedules the files to be removed at the next
commit. To undo a remove before that, see hg revert. To undo
added files, see hg forget.
-A/--after can be used to remove only files that have already
been deleted, -f/--force can be used to force deletion, and -Af
can be used to remove files from the next revision without
deleting them from the working directory.
The following table details the behavior of remove for different
file states (columns) and option combinations (rows). The file
states are Added [A], Clean [C], Modified [M] and Missing [!]
(as reported by hg status). The actions are Warn, Remove (from
branch) and Delete (from disk):
┌───────────┬───┬────┬────┬───┐
│ opt/state │ A │ C │ M │ ! │
├───────────┼───┼────┼────┼───┤
│ none │ W │ RD │ W │ R │
├───────────┼───┼────┼────┼───┤
│ -f │ R │ RD │ RD │ R │
├───────────┼───┼────┼────┼───┤
│ -A │ W │ W │ W │ R │
├───────────┼───┼────┼────┼───┤
│ -Af │ R │ R │ R │ R │
└───────────┴───┴────┴────┴───┘
Note hg remove never deletes files in Added [A] state from the
working directory, not even if --force is specified.
Returns 0 on success, 1 if any warnings encountered.
Options:
-A, --after
record delete for missing files
-f, --force
forget added files, delete modified files
-S, --subrepos
recurse into subrepositories
-I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
include names matching the given patterns
-X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
exclude names matching the given patterns
-n, --dry-run
do not perform actions, just print output
[+] marked option can be specified multiple times
aliases: rm
rename
rename files; equivalent of copy + remove:
hg rename [OPTION]... SOURCE... DEST
Mark dest as copies of sources; mark sources for deletion. If
dest is a directory, copies are put in that directory. If dest is
a file, there can only be one source.
By default, this command copies the contents of files as they
exist in the working directory. If invoked with -A/--after, the
operation is recorded, but no copying is performed.
To undo marking a destination file as renamed, use --forget. With
that option, all given (positional) arguments are unmarked as
renames. The destination file(s) will be left in place (still
tracked). The source file(s) will not be restored. Note that hg
rename --forget behaves the same way as hg copy --forget.
This command takes effect with the next commit by default.
Returns 0 on success, 1 if errors are encountered.
Options:
--forget
unmark a destination file as renamed
-A, --after
record a rename that has already occurred
--at-rev <REV>
(un)mark renames in the given revision (EXPERIMENTAL)
-f, --force
forcibly move over an existing managed file
-I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
include names matching the given patterns
-X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
exclude names matching the given patterns
-n, --dry-run
do not perform actions, just print output
[+] marked option can be specified multiple times
aliases: move mv
resolve
redo merges or set/view the merge status of files:
hg resolve [OPTION]... [FILE]...
Merges with unresolved conflicts are often the result of
non-interactive merging using the internal:merge configuration
setting, or a command-line merge tool like diff3. The resolve
command is used to manage the files involved in a merge, after hg
merge has been run, and before hg commit is run (i.e. the working
directory must have two parents). See hg help merge-tools for
information on configuring merge tools.
The resolve command can be used in the following ways:
• hg resolve [--re-merge] [--tool TOOL] FILE...: attempt to
re-merge the specified files, discarding any previous merge
attempts. Re-merging is not performed for files already marked
as resolved. Use --all/-a to select all unresolved files.
--tool can be used to specify the merge tool used for the given
files. It overrides the HGMERGE environment variable and your
configuration files. Previous file contents are saved with a
.orig suffix.
• hg resolve -m [FILE]: mark a file as having been resolved (e.g.
after having manually fixed-up the files). The default is to
mark all unresolved files.
• hg resolve -u [FILE]...: mark a file as unresolved. The default
is to mark all resolved files.
• hg resolve -l: list files which had or still have conflicts.
In the printed list, U = unresolved and R = resolved. You can
use set:unresolved() or set:resolved() to filter the list. See
hg help filesets for details.
Note Mercurial will not let you commit files with unresolved
merge conflicts. You must use hg resolve -m ... before you
can commit after a conflicting merge.
Template:
The following keywords are supported in addition to the common
template keywords and functions. See also hg help templates.
mergestatus
String. Character denoting merge conflicts, U or R.
path String. Repository-absolute path of the file.
Returns 0 on success, 1 if any files fail a resolve attempt.
Options:
-a, --all
select all unresolved files
-l, --list
list state of files needing merge
-m, --mark
mark files as resolved
-u, --unmark
mark files as unresolved
-n, --no-status
hide status prefix
--re-merge
re-merge files
-t,--tool <TOOL>
specify merge tool
-I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
include names matching the given patterns
-X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
exclude names matching the given patterns
-T,--template <TEMPLATE>
display with template
[+] marked option can be specified multiple times
revert
restore files to their checkout state:
hg revert [OPTION]... [-r REV] [NAME]...
Note To check out earlier revisions, you should use hg update
REV. To cancel an uncommitted merge (and lose your
changes), use hg merge --abort.
With no revision specified, revert the specified files or
directories to the contents they had in the parent of the working
directory. This restores the contents of files to an unmodified
state and unschedules adds, removes, copies, and renames. If the
working directory has two parents, you must explicitly specify a
revision.
Using the -r/--rev or -d/--date options, revert the given files
or directories to their states as of a specific revision. Because
revert does not change the working directory parents, this will
cause these files to appear modified. This can be helpful to
"back out" some or all of an earlier change. See hg backout for a
related method.
Modified files are saved with a .orig suffix before reverting.
To disable these backups, use --no-backup. It is possible to
store the backup files in a custom directory relative to the root
of the repository by setting the ui.origbackuppath configuration
option.
See hg help dates for a list of formats valid for -d/--date.
See hg help backout for a way to reverse the effect of an earlier
changeset.
Returns 0 on success.
Options:
-a, --all
revert all changes when no arguments given
-d,--date <DATE>
tipmost revision matching date
-r,--rev <REV>
revert to the specified revision
-C, --no-backup
do not save backup copies of files
-i, --interactive
interactively select the changes
-I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
include names matching the given patterns
-X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
exclude names matching the given patterns
-n, --dry-run
do not perform actions, just print output
[+] marked option can be specified multiple times
root
print the root (top) of the current working directory:
hg root
Print the root directory of the current repository.
Template:
The following keywords are supported in addition to the common
template keywords and functions. See also hg help templates.
hgpath String. Path to the .hg directory.
storepath
String. Path to the directory holding versioned data.
Returns 0 on success.
Options:
-T,--template <TEMPLATE>
display with template
shelve
save and set aside changes from the working directory:
hg shelve [OPTION]... [FILE]...
Shelving takes files that "hg status" reports as not clean, saves
the modifications to a bundle (a shelved change), and reverts the
files so that their state in the working directory becomes clean.
To restore these changes to the working directory, using "hg
unshelve"; this will work even if you switch to a different
commit.
When no files are specified, "hg shelve" saves all not-clean
files. If specific files or directories are named, only changes
to those files are shelved.
In bare shelve (when no files are specified, without interactive,
include and exclude option), shelving remembers information if
the working directory was on newly created branch, in other words
working directory was on different branch than its first parent.
In this situation unshelving restores branch information to the
working directory.
Each shelved change has a name that makes it easier to find
later. The name of a shelved change defaults to being based on
the active bookmark, or if there is no active bookmark, the
current named branch. To specify a different name, use --name.
To see a list of existing shelved changes, use the --list option.
For each shelved change, this will print its name, age, and
description; use --patch or --stat for more details.
To delete specific shelved changes, use --delete. To delete all
shelved changes, use --cleanup.
Options:
-A, --addremove
mark new/missing files as added/removed before shelving
-u, --unknown
store unknown files in the shelve
--cleanup
delete all shelved changes
--date <DATE>
shelve with the specified commit date
-d, --delete
delete the named shelved change(s)
-e, --edit
invoke editor on commit messages
-k, --keep
shelve, but keep changes in the working directory
-l, --list
list current shelves
-m,--message <TEXT>
use text as shelve message
-n,--name <NAME>
use the given name for the shelved commit
-p, --patch
output patches for changes (provide the names of the
shelved changes as positional arguments)
-i, --interactive
interactive mode
--stat output diffstat-style summary of changes (provide the
names of the shelved changes as positional arguments)
-I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
include names matching the given patterns
-X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
exclude names matching the given patterns
[+] marked option can be specified multiple times
status
show changed files in the working directory:
hg status [OPTION]... [FILE]...
Show status of files in the repository. If names are given, only
files that match are shown. Files that are clean or ignored or
the source of a copy/move operation, are not listed unless
-c/--clean, -i/--ignored, -C/--copies or -A/--all are given.
Unless options described with "show only ..." are given, the
options -mardu are used.
Option -q/--quiet hides untracked (unknown and ignored) files
unless explicitly requested with -u/--unknown or -i/--ignored.
Note hg status may appear to disagree with diff if permissions
have changed or a merge has occurred. The standard diff
format does not report permission changes and diff only
reports changes relative to one merge parent.
If one revision is given, it is used as the base revision. If
two revisions are given, the differences between them are shown.
The --change option can also be used as a shortcut to list the
changed files of a revision from its first parent.
The codes used to show the status of files are:
M = modified
A = added
R = removed
C = clean
! = missing (deleted by non-hg command, but still tracked)
? = not tracked
I = ignored
= origin of the previous file (with --copies)
The -t/--terse option abbreviates the output by showing only the
directory name if all the files in it share the same status. The
option takes an argument indicating the statuses to abbreviate:
'm' for 'modified', 'a' for 'added', 'r' for 'removed', 'd' for
'deleted', 'u' for 'unknown', 'i' for 'ignored' and 'c' for
clean.
It abbreviates only those statuses which are passed. Note that
clean and ignored files are not displayed with '--terse ic'
unless the -c/--clean and -i/--ignored options are also used.
The -v/--verbose option shows information when the repository is
in an unfinished merge, shelve, rebase state etc. You can have
this behavior turned on by default by enabling the
commands.status.verbose option.
You can skip displaying some of these states by setting
commands.status.skipstates to one or more of: 'bisect', 'graft',
'histedit', 'merge', 'rebase', or 'unshelve'.
Template:
The following keywords are supported in addition to the common
template keywords and functions. See also hg help templates.
path String. Repository-absolute path of the file.
source String. Repository-absolute path of the file originated
from. Available if --copies is specified.
status String. Character denoting file's status.
Examples:
• show changes in the working directory relative to a changeset:
hg status --rev 9353
• show changes in the working directory relative to the current
directory (see hg help patterns for more information):
hg status re:
• show all changes including copies in an existing changeset:
hg status --copies --change 9353
• get a NUL separated list of added files, suitable for xargs:
hg status -an0
• show more information about the repository status, abbreviating
added, removed, modified, deleted, and untracked paths:
hg status -v -t mardu
Returns 0 on success.
Options:
-A, --all
show status of all files
-m, --modified
show only modified files
-a, --added
show only added files
-r, --removed
show only removed files
-d, --deleted
show only missing files
-c, --clean
show only files without changes
-u, --unknown
show only unknown (not tracked) files
-i, --ignored
show only ignored files
-n, --no-status
hide status prefix
-t,--terse <VALUE>
show the terse output (EXPERIMENTAL) (default: nothing)
-C, --copies
show source of copied files (DEFAULT: ui.statuscopies)
-0, --print0
end filenames with NUL, for use with xargs
--rev <REV[+]>
show difference from revision
--change <REV>
list the changed files of a revision
-I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
include names matching the given patterns
-X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
exclude names matching the given patterns
-S, --subrepos
recurse into subrepositories
-T,--template <TEMPLATE>
display with template
[+] marked option can be specified multiple times
aliases: st
summary
summarize working directory state:
hg summary [--remote]
This generates a brief summary of the working directory state,
including parents, branch, commit status, phase and available
updates.
With the --remote option, this will check the default paths for
incoming and outgoing changes. This can be time-consuming.
Returns 0 on success.
Options:
--remote
check for push and pull
aliases: sum
unshelve
restore a shelved change to the working directory:
hg unshelve [OPTION]... [[-n] SHELVED]
This command accepts an optional name of a shelved change to
restore. If none is given, the most recent shelved change is
used.
If a shelved change is applied successfully, the bundle that
contains the shelved changes is moved to a backup location
(.hg/shelve-backup).
Since you can restore a shelved change on top of an arbitrary
commit, it is possible that unshelving will result in a conflict
between your changes and the commits you are unshelving onto. If
this occurs, you must resolve the conflict, then use --continue
to complete the unshelve operation. (The bundle will not be moved
until you successfully complete the unshelve.)
(Alternatively, you can use --abort to abandon an unshelve that
causes a conflict. This reverts the unshelved changes, and leaves
the bundle in place.)
If bare shelved change (without interactive, include and exclude
option) was done on newly created branch it would restore branch
information to the working directory.
After a successful unshelve, the shelved changes are stored in a
backup directory. Only the N most recent backups are kept. N
defaults to 10 but can be overridden using the shelve.maxbackups
configuration option.
Timestamp in seconds is used to decide order of backups. More
than maxbackups backups are kept, if same timestamp prevents from
deciding exact order of them, for safety.
Selected changes can be unshelved with --interactive flag. The
working directory is updated with the selected changes, and only
the unselected changes remain shelved. Note: The whole shelve is
applied to working directory first before running interactively.
So, this will bring up all the conflicts between working
directory and the shelve, irrespective of which changes will be
unshelved.
Options:
-a, --abort
abort an incomplete unshelve operation
-c, --continue
continue an incomplete unshelve operation
-i, --interactive
use interactive mode (EXPERIMENTAL)
-k, --keep
keep shelve after unshelving
-n,--name <NAME>
restore shelved change with given name
-t,--tool <VALUE>
specify merge tool
--date <DATE>
set date for temporary commits (DEPRECATED)
update
update working directory (or switch revisions):
hg update [-C|-c|-m] [-d DATE] [[-r] REV]
Update the repository's working directory to the specified
changeset. If no changeset is specified, update to the tip of the
current named branch and move the active bookmark (see hg help
bookmarks).
Update sets the working directory's parent revision to the
specified changeset (see hg help parents).
If the changeset is not a descendant or ancestor of the working
directory's parent and there are uncommitted changes, the update
is aborted. With the -c/--check option, the working directory is
checked for uncommitted changes; if none are found, the working
directory is updated to the specified changeset.
The -C/--clean, -c/--check, and -m/--merge options control what
happens if the working directory contains uncommitted changes.
At most of one of them can be specified.
1. If no option is specified, and if the requested changeset is
an ancestor or descendant of the working directory's parent,
the uncommitted changes are merged into the requested
changeset and the merged result is left uncommitted. If the
requested changeset is not an ancestor or descendant (that is,
it is on another branch), the update is aborted and the
uncommitted changes are preserved.
2. With the -m/--merge option, the update is allowed even if the
requested changeset is not an ancestor or descendant of the
working directory's parent.
3. With the -c/--check option, the update is aborted and the
uncommitted changes are preserved.
4. With the -C/--clean option, uncommitted changes are discarded
and the working directory is updated to the requested
changeset.
To cancel an uncommitted merge (and lose your changes), use hg
merge --abort.
Use null as the changeset to remove the working directory (like
hg clone -U).
If you want to revert just one file to an older revision, use hg
revert [-r REV] NAME.
See hg help dates for a list of formats valid for -d/--date.
Returns 0 on success, 1 if there are unresolved files.
Options:
-C, --clean
discard uncommitted changes (no backup)
-c, --check
require clean working directory
-m, --merge
merge uncommitted changes
-d,--date <DATE>
tipmost revision matching date
-r,--rev <REV>
revision
-t,--tool <TOOL>
specify merge tool
aliases: up checkout co
Change import/export
archive
create an unversioned archive of a repository revision:
hg archive [OPTION]... DEST
By default, the revision used is the parent of the working
directory; use -r/--rev to specify a different revision.
The archive type is automatically detected based on file
extension (to override, use -t/--type).
Examples:
• create a zip file containing the 1.0 release:
hg archive -r 1.0 project-1.0.zip
• create a tarball excluding .hg files:
hg archive project.tar.gz -X ".hg*"
Valid types are:
files
a directory full of files (default)
tar
tar archive, uncompressed
tbz2
tar archive, compressed using bzip2
tgz
tar archive, compressed using gzip
txz
tar archive, compressed using lzma (only in Python 3)
uzip
zip archive, uncompressed
zip
zip archive, compressed using deflate
The exact name of the destination archive or directory is given
using a format string; see hg help export for details.
Each member added to an archive file has a directory prefix
prepended. Use -p/--prefix to specify a format string for the
prefix. The default is the basename of the archive, with suffixes
removed.
Returns 0 on success.
Options:
--no-decode
do not pass files through decoders
-p,--prefix <PREFIX>
directory prefix for files in archive
-r,--rev <REV>
revision to distribute
-t,--type <TYPE>
type of distribution to create
-S, --subrepos
recurse into subrepositories
-I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
include names matching the given patterns
-X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
exclude names matching the given patterns
[+] marked option can be specified multiple times
bundle
create a bundle file:
hg bundle [-f] [-t BUNDLESPEC] [-a] [-r REV]... [--base REV]... FILE [DEST]...
Generate a bundle file containing data to be transferred to
another repository.
To create a bundle containing all changesets, use -a/--all (or
--base null). Otherwise, hg assumes the destination will have all
the nodes you specify with --base parameters. Otherwise, hg will
assume the repository has all the nodes in destination, or
default-push/default if no destination is specified, where
destination is the repositories you provide through DEST option.
You can change bundle format with the -t/--type option. See hg
help bundlespec for documentation on this format. By default, the
most appropriate format is used and compression defaults to
bzip2.
The bundle file can then be transferred using conventional means
and applied to another repository with the unbundle or pull
command. This is useful when direct push and pull are not
available or when exporting an entire repository is undesirable.
Applying bundles preserves all changeset contents including
permissions, copy/rename information, and revision history.
Returns 0 on success, 1 if no changes found.
Options:
-f, --force
run even when the destination is unrelated
-r,--rev <REV[+]>
a changeset intended to be added to the destination
-b,--branch <BRANCH[+]>
a specific branch you would like to bundle
--base <REV[+]>
a base changeset assumed to be available at the
destination
-a, --all
bundle all changesets in the repository
-t,--type <TYPE>
bundle compression type to use (default: bzip2)
-e,--ssh <CMD>
specify ssh command to use
--remotecmd <CMD>
specify hg command to run on the remote side
--insecure
do not verify server certificate (ignoring web.cacerts
config)
[+] marked option can be specified multiple times
export
dump the header and diffs for one or more changesets:
hg export [OPTION]... [-o OUTFILESPEC] [-r] [REV]...
Print the changeset header and diffs for one or more revisions.
If no revision is given, the parent of the working directory is
used.
The information shown in the changeset header is: author, date,
branch name (if non-default), changeset hash, parent(s) and
commit comment.
Note hg export may generate unexpected diff output for merge
changesets, as it will compare the merge changeset against
its first parent only.
Output may be to a file, in which case the name of the file is
given using a template string. See hg help templates. In addition
to the common template keywords, the following formatting rules
are supported:
%%
literal "%" character
%H
changeset hash (40 hexadecimal digits)
%N
number of patches being generated
%R
changeset revision number
%b
basename of the exporting repository
%h
short-form changeset hash (12 hexadecimal digits)
%m
first line of the commit message (only alphanumeric
characters)
%n
zero-padded sequence number, starting at 1
%r
zero-padded changeset revision number
\
literal "" character
Without the -a/--text option, export will avoid generating diffs
of files it detects as binary. With -a, export will generate a
diff anyway, probably with undesirable results.
With -B/--bookmark changesets reachable by the given bookmark are
selected.
Use the -g/--git option to generate diffs in the git extended
diff format. See hg help diffs for more information.
With the --switch-parent option, the diff will be against the
second parent. It can be useful to review a merge.
Template:
The following keywords are supported in addition to the common
template keywords and functions. See also hg help templates.
diff String. Diff content.
parents
List of strings. Parent nodes of the changeset.
Examples:
• use export and import to transplant a bugfix to the current
branch:
hg export -r 9353 | hg import -
• export all the changesets between two revisions to a file with
rename information:
hg export --git -r 123:150 > changes.txt
• split outgoing changes into a series of patches with
descriptive names:
hg export -r "outgoing()" -o "%n-%m.patch"
Returns 0 on success.
Options:
-B,--bookmark <BOOKMARK>
export changes only reachable by given bookmark
-o,--output <FORMAT>
print output to file with formatted name
--switch-parent
diff against the second parent
-r,--rev <REV[+]>
revisions to export
-a, --text
treat all files as text
-g, --git
use git extended diff format (DEFAULT: diff.git)
--binary
generate binary diffs in git mode (default)
--nodates
omit dates from diff headers
-T,--template <TEMPLATE>
display with template
[+] marked option can be specified multiple times
import
import an ordered set of patches:
hg import [OPTION]... PATCH...
Import a list of patches and commit them individually (unless
--no-commit is specified).
To read a patch from standard input (stdin), use "-" as the patch
name. If a URL is specified, the patch will be downloaded from
there.
Import first applies changes to the working directory (unless
--bypass is specified), import will abort if there are
outstanding changes.
Use --bypass to apply and commit patches directly to the
repository, without affecting the working directory. Without
--exact, patches will be applied on top of the working directory
parent revision.
You can import a patch straight from a mail message. Even patches
as attachments work (to use the body part, it must have type
text/plain or text/x-patch). From and Subject headers of email
message are used as default committer and commit message. All
text/plain body parts before first diff are added to the commit
message.
If the imported patch was generated by hg export, user and
description from patch override values from message headers and
body. Values given on command line with -m/--message and
-u/--user override these.
If --exact is specified, import will set the working directory to
the parent of each patch before applying it, and will abort if
the resulting changeset has a different ID than the one recorded
in the patch. This will guard against various ways that portable
patch formats and mail systems might fail to transfer Mercurial
data or metadata. See hg bundle for lossless transmission.
Use --partial to ensure a changeset will be created from the
patch even if some hunks fail to apply. Hunks that fail to apply
will be written to a <target-file>.rej file. Conflicts can then
be resolved by hand before hg commit --amend is run to update the
created changeset. This flag exists to let people import patches
that partially apply without losing the associated metadata
(author, date, description, ...).
Note When no hunks apply cleanly, hg import --partial will
create an empty changeset, importing only the patch
metadata.
With -s/--similarity, hg will attempt to discover renames and
copies in the patch in the same way as hg addremove.
It is possible to use external patch programs to perform the
patch by setting the ui.patch configuration option. For the
default internal tool, the fuzz can also be configured via
patch.fuzz. See hg help config for more information about
configuration files and how to use these options.
See hg help dates for a list of formats valid for -d/--date.
Examples:
• import a traditional patch from a website and detect renames:
hg import -s 80 http://example.com/bugfix.patch
• import a changeset from an hgweb server:
hg import https://www.mercurial-scm.org/repo/hg/rev/5ca8c111e9aa
• import all the patches in an Unix-style mbox:
hg import incoming-patches.mbox
• import patches from stdin:
hg import -
• attempt to exactly restore an exported changeset (not always
possible):
hg import --exact proposed-fix.patch
• use an external tool to apply a patch which is too fuzzy for
the default internal tool.
hg import --config ui.patch="patch --merge" fuzzy.patch
• change the default fuzzing from 2 to a less strict 7
hg import --config ui.fuzz=7 fuzz.patch
Returns 0 on success, 1 on partial success (see --partial).
Options:
-p,--strip <NUM>
directory strip option for patch. This has the same
meaning as the corresponding patch option (default: 1)
-b,--base <PATH>
base path (DEPRECATED)
--secret
use the secret phase for committing
-e, --edit
invoke editor on commit messages
-f, --force
skip check for outstanding uncommitted changes
(DEPRECATED)
--no-commit
don't commit, just update the working directory
--bypass
apply patch without touching the working directory
--partial
commit even if some hunks fail
--exact
abort if patch would apply lossily
--prefix <DIR>
apply patch to subdirectory
--import-branch
use any branch information in patch (implied by --exact)
-m,--message <TEXT>
use text as commit message
-l,--logfile <FILE>
read commit message from file
-d,--date <DATE>
record the specified date as commit date
-u,--user <USER>
record the specified user as committer
-s,--similarity <SIMILARITY>
guess renamed files by similarity (0<=s<=100)
aliases: patch
unbundle
apply one or more bundle files:
hg unbundle [-u] FILE...
Apply one or more bundle files generated by hg bundle.
Returns 0 on success, 1 if an update has unresolved files.
Options:
-u, --update
update to new branch head if changesets were unbundled
Repository maintenance
manifest
output the current or given revision of the project manifest:
hg manifest [-r REV]
Print a list of version controlled files for the given revision.
If no revision is given, the first parent of the working
directory is used, or the null revision if no revision is checked
out.
With -v, print file permissions, symlink and executable bits.
With --debug, print file revision hashes.
If option --all is specified, the list of all files from all
revisions is printed. This includes deleted and renamed files.
Returns 0 on success.
Options:
-r,--rev <REV>
revision to display
--all list files from all revisions
-T,--template <TEMPLATE>
display with template
recover
roll back an interrupted transaction:
hg recover
Recover from an interrupted commit or pull.
This command tries to fix the repository status after an
interrupted operation. It should only be necessary when Mercurial
suggests it.
Returns 0 if successful, 1 if nothing to recover or verify fails.
Options:
--verify
run hg verify after successful recover
rollback
roll back the last transaction (DANGEROUS) (DEPRECATED):
hg rollback
Please use hg commit --amend instead of rollback to correct
mistakes in the last commit.
This command should be used with care. There is only one level of
rollback, and there is no way to undo a rollback. It will also
restore the dirstate at the time of the last transaction, losing
any dirstate changes since that time. This command does not alter
the working directory.
Transactions are used to encapsulate the effects of all commands
that create new changesets or propagate existing changesets into
a repository.
For example, the following commands are transactional, and their
effects can be rolled back:
• commit
• import
• pull
• push (with this repository as the destination)
• unbundle
To avoid permanent data loss, rollback will refuse to rollback a
commit transaction if it isn't checked out. Use --force to
override this protection.
The rollback command can be entirely disabled by setting the
ui.rollback configuration setting to false. If you're here
because you want to use rollback and it's disabled, you can
re-enable the command by setting ui.rollback to true.
This command is not intended for use on public repositories. Once
changes are visible for pull by other users, rolling a
transaction back locally is ineffective (someone else may already
have pulled the changes). Furthermore, a race is possible with
readers of the repository; for example an in-progress pull from
the repository may fail if a rollback is performed.
Returns 0 on success, 1 if no rollback data is available.
Options:
-n, --dry-run
do not perform actions, just print output
-f, --force
ignore safety measures
verify
verify the integrity of the repository:
hg verify
Verify the integrity of the current repository.
This will perform an extensive check of the repository's
integrity, validating the hashes and checksums of each entry in
the changelog, manifest, and tracked files, as well as the
integrity of their crosslinks and indices.
Please see https://mercurial-scm.org/wiki/RepositoryCorruption
for more information about recovery from corruption of the
repository.
Returns 0 on success, 1 if errors are encountered.
Options:
--full perform more checks (EXPERIMENTAL)
Help
config
show combined config settings from all hgrc files:
hg config [-u] [NAME]...
With no arguments, print names and values of all config items.
With one argument of the form section.name, print just the value
of that config item.
With multiple arguments, print names and values of all config
items with matching section names or section.names.
With --edit, start an editor on the user-level config file. With
--global, edit the system-wide config file. With --local, edit
the repository-level config file.
With --source, the source (filename and line number) is printed
for each config item.
See hg help config for more information about config files.
--non-shared flag is used to edit .hg/hgrc-not-shared config
file. This file is not shared across shares when in share-safe
mode.
Template:
The following keywords are supported. See also hg help templates.
name String. Config name.
source String. Filename and line number where the item is
defined.
value String. Config value.
The --shared flag can be used to edit the config file of shared
source repository. It only works when you have shared using the
experimental share safe feature.
Returns 0 on success, 1 if NAME does not exist.
Options:
-u, --untrusted
show untrusted configuration options
--exp-all-known
show all known config option (EXPERIMENTAL)
-e, --edit
edit user config
-l, --local
edit repository config
--source
show source of configuration value
--shared
edit shared source repository config (EXPERIMENTAL)
--non-shared
edit non shared config (EXPERIMENTAL)
-g, --global
edit global config
-T,--template <TEMPLATE>
display with template
aliases: showconfig debugconfig
help
show help for a given topic or a help overview:
hg help [-eck] [-s PLATFORM] [TOPIC]
With no arguments, print a list of commands with short help
messages.
Given a topic, extension, or command name, print help for that
topic.
Returns 0 if successful.
Options:
-e, --extension
show only help for extensions
-c, --command
show only help for commands
-k, --keyword
show topics matching keyword
-s,--system <PLATFORM[+]>
show help for specific platform(s)
[+] marked option can be specified multiple times
version
output version and copyright information:
hg version
Template:
The following keywords are supported. See also hg help templates.
extensions
List of extensions.
ver String. Version number.
And each entry of {extensions} provides the following
sub-keywords in addition to {ver}.
bundled
Boolean. True if included in the release.
name String. Extension name.
Options:
-T,--template <TEMPLATE>
display with template
Uncategorized commands
Mercurial supports generating standalone "bundle" files that hold
repository data. These "bundles" are typically saved locally and
used later or exchanged between different repositories, possibly
on different machines. Example commands using bundles are hg
bundle and hg unbundle.
Generation of bundle files is controlled by a "bundle
specification" ("bundlespec") string. This string tells the
bundle generation process how to create the bundle.
A "bundlespec" string is composed of the following elements:
type A string denoting the bundle format to use.
compression
Denotes the compression engine to use compressing the raw
bundle data.
parameters
Arbitrary key-value parameters to further control bundle
generation.
A "bundlespec" string has the following formats:
<type> The literal bundle format string is used.
<compression>-<type>
The compression engine and format are delimited by a
hyphen (-).
Optional parameters follow the <type>. Parameters are URI escaped
key=value pairs. Each pair is delimited by a semicolon (;). The
first parameter begins after a ; immediately following the <type>
value.
Available Types
The following bundle <type> strings are available:
v1 Produces a legacy "changegroup" version 1 bundle.
This format is compatible with nearly all Mercurial
clients because it is the oldest. However, it has some
limitations, which is why it is no longer the default for
new repositories.
v1 bundles can be used with modern repositories using the
"generaldelta" storage format. However, it may take longer
to produce the bundle and the resulting bundle may be
significantly larger than a v2 bundle.
v1 bundles can only use the gzip, bzip2, and none
compression formats.
v2 Produces a version 2 bundle.
Version 2 bundles are an extensible format that can store
additional repository data (such as bookmarks and phases
information) and they can store data more efficiently,
resulting in smaller bundles.
Version 2 bundles can also use modern compression engines,
such as zstd, making them faster to compress and often
smaller.
Available Compression Engines
The following bundle <compression> engines can be used:
bzip2
An algorithm that produces smaller bundles than gzip.
All Mercurial clients should support this format.
This engine will likely produce smaller bundles than gzip
but will be significantly slower, both during compression
and decompression.
If available, the zstd engine can yield similar or better
compression at much higher speeds.
gzip
zlib compression using the DEFLATE algorithm.
All Mercurial clients should support this format. The
compression algorithm strikes a reasonable balance between
compression ratio and size.
none
No compression is performed.
Use this compression engine to explicitly disable
compression.
Examples
v2
Produce a v2 bundle using default options, including
compression.
none-v1
Produce a v1 bundle with no compression.
zstd-v2
Produce a v2 bundle with zstandard compression using
default settings.
zstd-v1
This errors because zstd is not supported for v1 types.
Mercurial colorizes output from several commands.
For example, the diff command shows additions in green and
deletions in red, while the status command shows modified files
in magenta. Many other commands have analogous colors. It is
possible to customize these colors.
To enable color (default) whenever possible use:
[ui]
color = yes
To disable color use:
[ui]
color = no
See hg help config.ui.color for details.
The default pager on Windows does not support color, so enabling
the pager will effectively disable color. See hg help
config.ui.paginate to disable the pager. Alternately, MSYS and
Cygwin shells provide less as a pager, which can be configured to
support ANSI color mode. Windows 10 natively supports ANSI color
mode.
Mode
Mercurial can use various systems to display color. The supported
modes are ansi, win32, and terminfo. See hg help config.color
for details about how to control the mode.
Effects
Other effects in addition to color, like bold and underlined
text, are also available. By default, the terminfo database is
used to find the terminal codes used to change color and effect.
If terminfo is not available, then effects are rendered with the
ECMA-48 SGR control function (aka ANSI escape codes).
The available effects in terminfo mode are 'blink', 'bold',
'dim', 'inverse', 'invisible', 'italic', 'standout', and
'underline'; in ECMA-48 mode, the options are 'bold', 'inverse',
'italic', and 'underline'. How each is rendered depends on the
terminal emulator. Some may not be available for a given
terminal type, and will be silently ignored.
If the terminfo entry for your terminal is missing codes for an
effect or has the wrong codes, you can add or override those
codes in your configuration:
[color]
terminfo.dim = \E[2m
where 'E' is substituted with an escape character.
Labels
Text receives color effects depending on the labels that it has.
Many default Mercurial commands emit labelled text. You can also
define your own labels in templates using the label function, see
hg help templates. A single portion of text may have more than
one label. In that case, effects given to the last label will
override any other effects. This includes the special "none"
effect, which nullifies other effects.
Labels are normally invisible. In order to see these labels and
their position in the text, use the global --color=debug option.
The same anchor text may be associated to multiple labels, e.g.
[log.changeset changeset.secret|changeset:
22611:6f0a53c8f587]
The following are the default effects for some default labels.
Default effects may be overridden from your configuration file:
[color]
status.modified = blue bold underline red_background
status.added = green bold
status.removed = red bold blue_background
status.deleted = cyan bold underline
status.unknown = magenta bold underline
status.ignored = black bold
# 'none' turns off all effects
status.clean = none
status.copied = none
qseries.applied = blue bold underline
qseries.unapplied = black bold
qseries.missing = red bold
diff.diffline = bold
diff.extended = cyan bold
diff.file_a = red bold
diff.file_b = green bold
diff.hunk = magenta
diff.deleted = red
diff.inserted = green
diff.changed = white
diff.tab =
diff.trailingwhitespace = bold red_background
# Blank so it inherits the style of the surrounding label
changeset.public =
changeset.draft =
changeset.secret =
resolve.unresolved = red bold
resolve.resolved = green bold
bookmarks.active = green
branches.active = none
branches.closed = black bold
branches.current = green
branches.inactive = none
tags.normal = green
tags.local = black bold
rebase.rebased = blue
rebase.remaining = red bold
shelve.age = cyan
shelve.newest = green bold
shelve.name = blue bold
histedit.remaining = red bold
Custom colors
Because there are only eight standard colors, Mercurial allows
you to define color names for other color slots which might be
available for your terminal type, assuming terminfo mode. For
instance:
color.brightblue = 12
color.pink = 207
color.orange = 202
to set 'brightblue' to color slot 12 (useful for 16 color
terminals that have brighter colors defined in the upper eight)
and, 'pink' and 'orange' to colors in 256-color xterm's default
color cube. These defined colors may then be used as any of the
pre-defined eight, including appending '_background' to set the
background to that color.
Some commands allow the user to specify a date, e.g.:
• backout, commit, import, tag: Specify the commit date.
• log, revert, update: Select revision(s) by date.
Many date formats are valid. Here are some examples:
• Wed Dec 6 13:18:29 2006 (local timezone assumed)
• Dec 6 13:18 -0600 (year assumed, time offset provided)
• Dec 6 13:18 UTC (UTC and GMT are aliases for +0000)
• Dec 6 (midnight)
• 13:18 (today assumed)
• 3:39 (3:39AM assumed)
• 3:39pm (15:39)
• 2006-12-06 13:18:29 (ISO 8601 format)
• 2006-12-6 13:18
• 2006-12-6
• 12-6
• 12/6
• 12/6/6 (Dec 6 2006)
• today (midnight)
• yesterday (midnight)
• now - right now
Lastly, there is Mercurial's internal format:
• 1165411109 0 (Wed Dec 6 13:18:29 2006 UTC)
This is the internal representation format for dates. The first
number is the number of seconds since the epoch (1970-01-01 00:00
UTC). The second is the offset of the local timezone, in seconds
west of UTC (negative if the timezone is east of UTC).
The log command also accepts date ranges:
• <DATE - at or before a given date/time
• >DATE - on or after a given date/time
• DATE to DATE - a date range, inclusive
• -DAYS - within a given number of days from today
Mercurial evolves over time, some features, options, commands may
be replaced by better and more secure alternatives. This topic
will help you migrating your existing usage and/or configuration
to newer features.
Commands
The following commands are still available but their use are not
recommended:
locate
This command has been replaced by hg files.
parents
This command can be replaced by hg summary or hg log with
appropriate revsets. See hg help revsets for more information.
tip
The recommended alternative is hg heads.
Options
web.allowpull
Renamed to allow-pull.
web.allow_push
Renamed to allow-push.
Mercurial's default format for showing changes between two
versions of a file is compatible with the unified format of GNU
diff, which can be used by GNU patch and many other standard
tools.
While this standard format is often enough, it does not encode
the following information:
• executable status and other permission bits
• copy or rename information
• changes in binary files
• creation or deletion of empty files
Mercurial also supports the extended diff format from the git VCS
which addresses these limitations. The git diff format is not
produced by default because a few widespread tools still do not
understand this format.
This means that when generating diffs from a Mercurial repository
(e.g. with hg export), you should be careful about things like
file copies and renames or other things mentioned above, because
when applying a standard diff to a different repository, this
extra information is lost. Mercurial's internal operations (like
push and pull) are not affected by this, because they use an
internal binary format for communicating changes.
To make Mercurial produce the git extended diff format, use the
--git option available for many commands, or set 'git = True' in
the [diff] section of your configuration file. You do not need to
set this option when importing diffs in this format or using them
in the mq extension.
HG Path to the 'hg' executable, automatically passed when
running hooks, extensions or external tools. If unset or
empty, this is the hg executable's name if it's frozen, or
an executable named 'hg' (with %PATHEXT% [defaulting to
COM/EXE/BAT/CMD] extensions on Windows) is searched.
HGEDITOR
This is the name of the editor to run when committing. See
EDITOR.
(deprecated, see hg help config.ui.editor)
HGENCODING
This overrides the default locale setting detected by
Mercurial. This setting is used to convert data including
usernames, changeset descriptions, tag names, and
branches. This setting can be overridden with the
--encoding command-line option.
HGENCODINGMODE
This sets Mercurial's behavior for handling unknown
characters while transcoding user input. The default is
"strict", which causes Mercurial to abort if it can't map
a character. Other settings include "replace", which
replaces unknown characters, and "ignore", which drops
them. This setting can be overridden with the
--encodingmode command-line option.
HGENCODINGAMBIGUOUS
This sets Mercurial's behavior for handling characters
with "ambiguous" widths like accented Latin characters
with East Asian fonts. By default, Mercurial assumes
ambiguous characters are narrow, set this variable to
"wide" if such characters cause formatting problems.
HGMERGE
An executable to use for resolving merge conflicts. The
program will be executed with three arguments: local file,
remote file, ancestor file.
(deprecated, see hg help config.ui.merge)
HGRCPATH
A list of files or directories to search for configuration
files. Item separator is ":" on Unix, ";" on Windows. If
HGRCPATH is not set, platform default search path is used.
If empty, only the .hg/hgrc from the current repository is
read.
For each element in HGRCPATH:
• if it's a directory, all files ending with .rc are added
• otherwise, the file itself will be added
HGRCSKIPREPO
When set, the .hg/hgrc from repositories are not read.
HGPLAIN
When set, this disables any configuration settings that
might change Mercurial's default output. This includes
encoding, defaults, verbose mode, debug mode, quiet mode,
tracebacks, and localization. This can be useful when
scripting against Mercurial in the face of existing user
configuration.
In addition to the features disabled by HGPLAIN=, the
following values can be specified to adjust behavior:
+strictflags
Restrict parsing of command line flags.
Equivalent options set via command line flags or
environment variables are not overridden.
See hg help scripting for details.
HGPLAINEXCEPT
This is a comma-separated list of features to preserve
when HGPLAIN is enabled. Currently the following values
are supported:
alias
Don't remove aliases.
color
Don't disable colored output.
i18n
Preserve internationalization.
revsetalias
Don't remove revset aliases.
templatealias
Don't remove template aliases.
progress
Don't hide progress output.
Setting HGPLAINEXCEPT to anything (even an empty string)
will enable plain mode.
HGUSER This is the string used as the author of a commit. If not
set, available values will be considered in this order:
• HGUSER (deprecated)
• configuration files from the HGRCPATH
• EMAIL
• interactive prompt
• LOGNAME (with @hostname appended)
(deprecated, see hg help config.ui.username)
EMAIL May be used as the author of a commit; see HGUSER.
LOGNAME
May be used as the author of a commit; see HGUSER.
VISUAL This is the name of the editor to use when committing. See
EDITOR.
EDITOR Sometimes Mercurial needs to open a text file in an editor
for a user to modify, for example when writing commit
messages. The editor it uses is determined by looking at
the environment variables HGEDITOR, VISUAL and EDITOR, in
that order. The first non-empty one is chosen. If all of
them are empty, the editor defaults to 'vi'.
PYTHONPATH
This is used by Python to find imported modules and may
need to be set appropriately if this Mercurial is not
installed system-wide.
Obsolescence markers make it possible to mark changesets that
have been deleted or superseded in a new version of the
changeset.
Unlike the previous way of handling such changes, by stripping
the old changesets from the repository, obsolescence markers can
be propagated between repositories. This allows for a safe and
simple way of exchanging mutable history and altering it after
the fact. Changeset phases are respected, such that only draft
and secret changesets can be altered (see hg help phases for
details).
Obsolescence is tracked using "obsolescence markers", a piece of
metadata tracking which changesets have been made obsolete,
potential successors for a given changeset, the moment the
changeset was marked as obsolete, and the user who performed the
rewriting operation. The markers are stored separately from
standard changeset data can be exchanged without any of the
precursor changesets, preventing unnecessary exchange of
obsolescence data.
The complete set of obsolescence markers describes a history of
changeset modifications that is orthogonal to the repository
history of file modifications. This changeset history allows for
detection and automatic resolution of edge cases arising from
multiple users rewriting the same part of history concurrently.
Current feature status
This feature is still in development.
Instability
Rewriting changesets might introduce instability.
There are two main kinds of instability: orphaning and diverging.
Orphans are changesets left behind when their ancestors are
rewritten. Divergence has two variants:
• Content-divergence occurs when independent rewrites of the same
changesets lead to different results.
• Phase-divergence occurs when the old (obsolete) version of a
changeset becomes public.
It is possible to prevent local creation of orphans by using the
following config:
[experimental]
evolution.createmarkers = true
evolution.exchange = true
You can also enable that option explicitly:
[experimental]
evolution.createmarkers = true
evolution.exchange = true
evolution.allowunstable = true
Mercurial has the ability to add new features through the use of
extensions. Extensions may add new commands, add options to
existing commands, change the default behavior of commands, or
implement hooks.
To enable the "foo" extension, either shipped with Mercurial or
in the Python search path, create an entry for it in your
configuration file, like this:
[extensions]
foo =
You may also specify the full path to an extension:
[extensions]
myfeature = ~/.hgext/myfeature.py
See hg help config for more information on configuration files.
Extensions are not loaded by default for a variety of reasons:
they can increase startup overhead; they may be meant for
advanced usage only; they may provide potentially dangerous
abilities (such as letting you destroy or modify history); they
might not be ready for prime time; or they may alter some usual
behaviors of stock Mercurial. It is thus up to the user to
activate extensions as needed.
To explicitly disable an extension enabled in a configuration
file of broader scope, prepend its path with !:
[extensions]
# disabling extension bar residing in /path/to/extension/bar.py
bar = !/path/to/extension/bar.py
# ditto, but no path was supplied for extension baz
baz = !
disabled extensions:
acl hooks for controlling repository access
blackbox
log repository events to a blackbox for debugging
bugzilla
hooks for integrating with the Bugzilla bug tracker
censor erase file content at a given revision
churn command to display statistics about repository history
clonebundles
advertise pre-generated bundles to seed clones
closehead
close arbitrary heads without checking them out first
convert
import revisions from foreign VCS repositories into
Mercurial
eol automatically manage newlines in repository files
extdiff
command to allow external programs to compare revisions
factotum
http authentication with factotum
fastexport
export repositories as git fast-import stream
githelp
try mapping git commands to Mercurial commands
gpg commands to sign and verify changesets
hgk browse the repository in a graphical way
highlight
syntax highlighting for hgweb (requires Pygments)
histedit
interactive history editing
keyword
expand keywords in tracked files
largefiles
track large binary files
mq manage a stack of patches
notify hooks for sending email push notifications
patchbomb
command to send changesets as (a series of) patch
emails
rebase command to move sets of revisions to a different
ancestor
relink recreates hardlinks between repository clones
schemes
extend schemes with shortcuts to repository swarms
share share a common history between several working
directories
transplant
command to transplant changesets from another branch
win32mbcs
allow the use of MBCS paths with problematic encodings
zeroconf
discover and advertise repositories on the local
network
Mercurial supports a functional language for selecting a set of
files.
Like other file patterns, this pattern type is indicated by a
prefix, 'set:'. The language supports a number of predicates
which are joined by infix operators. Parenthesis can be used for
grouping.
Identifiers such as filenames or patterns must be quoted with
single or double quotes if they contain characters outside of
[.*{}[]?/\_a-zA-Z0-9\x80-\xff] or if they match one of the
predefined predicates. This generally applies to file patterns
other than globs and arguments for predicates. Pattern prefixes
such as path: may be specified without quoting.
Special characters can be used in quoted identifiers by escaping
them, e.g., \n is interpreted as a newline. To prevent them from
being interpreted, strings can be prefixed with r, e.g. r'...'.
See also hg help patterns.
Operators
There is a single prefix operator:
not x
Files not in x. Short form is ! x.
These are the supported infix operators:
x and y
The intersection of files in x and y. Short form is x & y.
x or y
The union of files in x and y. There are two alternative
short forms: x | y and x + y.
x - y
Files in x but not in y.
Predicates
The following predicates are supported:
added()
File that is added according to hg status.
binary()
File that appears to be binary (contains NUL bytes).
clean()
File that is clean according to hg status.
copied()
File that is recorded as being copied.
deleted()
Alias for missing().
encoding(name)
File can be successfully decoded with the given character
encoding. May not be useful for encodings other than ASCII
and UTF-8.
eol(style)
File contains newlines of the given style (dos, unix,
mac). Binary files are excluded, files with mixed line
endings match multiple styles.
exec()
File that is marked as executable.
grep(regex)
File contains the given regular expression.
hgignore()
File that matches the active .hgignore pattern.
ignored()
File that is ignored according to hg status.
missing()
File that is missing according to hg status.
modified()
File that is modified according to hg status.
portable()
File that has a portable name. (This doesn't include
filenames with case collisions.)
removed()
File that is removed according to hg status.
resolved()
File that is marked resolved according to hg resolve -l.
revs(revs, pattern)
Evaluate set in the specified revisions. If the revset
match multiple revs, this will return file matching
pattern in any of the revision.
size(expression)
File size matches the given expression. Examples:
• size('1k') - files from 1024 to 2047 bytes
• size('< 20k') - files less than 20480 bytes
• size('>= .5MB') - files at least 524288 bytes
• size('4k - 1MB') - files from 4096 bytes to 1048576
bytes
status(base, rev, pattern)
Evaluate predicate using status change between base and
rev. Examples:
• status(3, 7, added()) - matches files added from "3" to
"7"
subrepo([pattern])
Subrepositories whose paths match the given pattern.
symlink()
File that is marked as a symlink.
tracked()
File that is under Mercurial control.
unknown()
File that is unknown according to hg status.
unresolved()
File that is marked unresolved according to hg resolve -l.
Examples
Some sample queries:
• Show status of files that appear to be binary in the working
directory:
hg status -A "set:binary()"
• Forget files that are in .hgignore but are already tracked:
hg forget "set:hgignore() and not ignored()"
• Find text files that contain a string:
hg files "set:grep(magic) and not binary()"
• Find C files in a non-standard encoding:
hg files "set:**.c and not encoding('UTF-8')"
• Revert copies of large binary files:
hg revert "set:copied() and binary() and size('>1M')"
• Revert files that were added to the working directory:
hg revert "set:revs('wdir()', added())"
• Remove files listed in foo.lst that contain the letter a or b:
hg remove "set: listfile:foo.lst and (**a* or **b*)"
Most Mercurial commands accept various flags.
Flag names
Flags for each command are listed in hg help for that command.
Additionally, some flags, such as --repository, are global and
can be used with any command - those are seen in hg help -v, and
can be specified before or after the command.
Every flag has at least a long name, such as --repository. Some
flags may also have a short one-letter name, such as the
equivalent -R. Using the short or long name is equivalent and has
the same effect. The long name may be abbreviated to any
unambiguous prefix. For example, hg commit --amend can be
abbreviated to hg commit --am.
Flags that have a short name can also be bundled together - for
instance, to specify both --edit (short -e) and --interactive
(short -i), one could use:
hg commit -ei
If any of the bundled flags takes a value (i.e. is not a
boolean), it must be last, followed by the value:
hg commit -im 'Message'
Flag types
Mercurial command-line flags can be strings, numbers, booleans,
or lists of strings.
Specifying flag values
The following syntaxes are allowed, assuming a flag 'flagname'
with short name 'f':
--flagname=foo
--flagname foo
-f foo
-ffoo
This syntax applies to all non-boolean flags (strings, numbers or
lists).
Specifying boolean flags
Boolean flags do not take a value parameter. To specify a
boolean, use the flag name to set it to true, or the same name
prefixed with 'no-' to set it to false:
hg commit --interactive
hg commit --no-interactive
Specifying list flags
List flags take multiple values. To specify them, pass the flag
multiple times:
hg files --include mercurial --include tests
Setting flag defaults
In order to set a default value for a flag in an hgrc file, it is
recommended to use aliases:
[alias]
commit = commit --interactive
For more information on hgrc files, see hg help config.
Overriding flags on the command line
If the same non-list flag is specified multiple times on the
command line, the latest specification is used:
hg commit -m "Ignored value" -m "Used value"
This includes the use of aliases - e.g., if one has:
[alias]
committemp = commit -m "Ignored value"
then the following command will override that -m:
hg committemp -m "Used value"
Overriding flag defaults
Every flag has a default value, and you may also set your own
defaults in hgrc as described above. Except for list flags,
defaults can be overridden on the command line simply by
specifying the flag in that location.
Hidden flags
Some flags are not shown in a command's help by default -
specifically, those that are deemed to be experimental,
deprecated or advanced. To show all flags, add the --verbose flag
for the help command:
hg help --verbose commit
Ancestor
Any changeset that can be reached by an unbroken chain of
parent changesets from a given changeset. More precisely,
the ancestors of a changeset can be defined by two
properties: a parent of a changeset is an ancestor, and a
parent of an ancestor is an ancestor. See also:
'Descendant'.
Bookmark
Bookmarks are pointers to certain commits that move when
committing. They are similar to tags in that it is
possible to use bookmark names in all places where
Mercurial expects a changeset ID, e.g., with hg update.
Unlike tags, bookmarks move along when you make a commit.
Bookmarks can be renamed, copied and deleted. Bookmarks
are local, unless they are explicitly pushed or pulled
between repositories. Pushing and pulling bookmarks allow
you to collaborate with others on a branch without
creating a named branch.
Branch (Noun) A child changeset that has been created from a
parent that is not a head. These are known as topological
branches, see 'Branch, topological'. If a topological
branch is named, it becomes a named branch. If a
topological branch is not named, it becomes an anonymous
branch. See 'Branch, anonymous' and 'Branch, named'.
Branches may be created when changes are pulled from or
pushed to a remote repository, since new heads may be
created by these operations. Note that the term branch can
also be used informally to describe a development process
in which certain development is done independently of
other development. This is sometimes done explicitly with
a named branch, but it can also be done locally, using
bookmarks or clones and anonymous branches.
Example: "The experimental branch."
(Verb) The action of creating a child changeset which
results in its parent having more than one child.
Example: "I'm going to branch at X."
Branch, anonymous
Every time a new child changeset is created from a parent
that is not a head and the name of the branch is not
changed, a new anonymous branch is created.
Branch, closed
A named branch whose branch heads have all been closed.
Branch, default
The branch assigned to a changeset when no name has
previously been assigned.
Branch head
See 'Head, branch'.
Branch, inactive
If a named branch has no topological heads, it is
considered to be inactive. As an example, a feature branch
becomes inactive when it is merged into the default
branch. The hg branches command shows inactive branches by
default, though they can be hidden with hg branches
--active.
NOTE: this concept is deprecated because it is too
implicit. Branches should now be explicitly closed using
hg commit --close-branch when they are no longer needed.
Branch, named
A collection of changesets which have the same branch
name. By default, children of a changeset in a named
branch belong to the same named branch. A child can be
explicitly assigned to a different branch. See hg help
branch, hg help branches and hg commit --close-branch for
more information on managing branches.
Named branches can be thought of as a kind of namespace,
dividing the collection of changesets that comprise the
repository into a collection of disjoint subsets. A named
branch is not necessarily a topological branch. If a new
named branch is created from the head of another named
branch, or the default branch, but no further changesets
are added to that previous branch, then that previous
branch will be a branch in name only.
Branch tip
See 'Tip, branch'.
Branch, topological
Every time a new child changeset is created from a parent
that is not a head, a new topological branch is created.
If a topological branch is named, it becomes a named
branch. If a topological branch is not named, it becomes
an anonymous branch of the current, possibly default,
branch.
Changelog
A record of the changesets in the order in which they were
added to the repository. This includes details such as
changeset id, author, commit message, date, and list of
changed files.
Changeset
A snapshot of the state of the repository used to record a
change.
Changeset, child
The converse of parent changeset: if P is a parent of C,
then C is a child of P. There is no limit to the number of
children that a changeset may have.
Changeset id
A SHA-1 hash that uniquely identifies a changeset. It may
be represented as either a "long" 40 hexadecimal digit
string, or a "short" 12 hexadecimal digit string.
Changeset, merge
A changeset with two parents. This occurs when a merge is
committed.
Changeset, parent
A revision upon which a child changeset is based.
Specifically, a parent changeset of a changeset C is a
changeset whose node immediately precedes C in the DAG.
Changesets have at most two parents.
Checkout
(Noun) The working directory being updated to a specific
revision. This use should probably be avoided where
possible, as changeset is much more appropriate than
checkout in this context.
Example: "I'm using checkout X."
(Verb) Updating the working directory to a specific
changeset. See hg help update.
Example: "I'm going to check out changeset X."
Child changeset
See 'Changeset, child'.
Close changeset
See 'Head, closed branch'.
Closed branch
See 'Branch, closed'.
Clone (Noun) An entire or partial copy of a repository. The
partial clone must be in the form of a revision and its
ancestors.
Example: "Is your clone up to date?"
(Verb) The process of creating a clone, using hg clone.
Example: "I'm going to clone the repository."
Closed branch head
See 'Head, closed branch'.
Commit (Noun) A synonym for changeset.
Example: "Is the bug fixed in your recent commit?"
(Verb) The act of recording changes to a repository. When
files are committed in a working directory, Mercurial
finds the differences between the committed files and
their parent changeset, creating a new changeset in the
repository.
Example: "You should commit those changes now."
Cset A common abbreviation of the term changeset.
DAG The repository of changesets of a distributed version
control system (DVCS) can be described as a directed
acyclic graph (DAG), consisting of nodes and edges, where
nodes correspond to changesets and edges imply a parent ->
child relation. This graph can be visualized by graphical
tools such as hg log --graph. In Mercurial, the DAG is
limited by the requirement for children to have at most
two parents.
Deprecated
Feature removed from documentation, but not scheduled for
removal.
Default branch
See 'Branch, default'.
Descendant
Any changeset that can be reached by a chain of child
changesets from a given changeset. More precisely, the
descendants of a changeset can be defined by two
properties: the child of a changeset is a descendant, and
the child of a descendant is a descendant. See also:
'Ancestor'.
Diff (Noun) The difference between the contents and attributes
of files in two changesets or a changeset and the current
working directory. The difference is usually represented
in a standard form called a "diff" or "patch". The "git
diff" format is used when the changes include copies,
renames, or changes to file attributes, none of which can
be represented/handled by classic "diff" and "patch".
Example: "Did you see my correction in the diff?"
(Verb) Diffing two changesets is the action of creating a
diff or patch.
Example: "If you diff with changeset X, you will see what
I mean."
Directory, working
The working directory represents the state of the files
tracked by Mercurial, that will be recorded in the next
commit. The working directory initially corresponds to the
snapshot at an existing changeset, known as the parent of
the working directory. See 'Parent, working directory'.
The state may be modified by changes to the files
introduced manually or by a merge. The repository metadata
exists in the .hg directory inside the working directory.
Draft Changesets in the draft phase have not been shared with
publishing repositories and may thus be safely changed by
history-modifying extensions. See hg help phases.
Experimental
Feature that may change or be removed at a later date.
Graph See DAG and hg log --graph.
Head The term 'head' may be used to refer to both a branch head
or a repository head, depending on the context. See 'Head,
branch' and 'Head, repository' for specific definitions.
Heads are where development generally takes place and are
the usual targets for update and merge operations.
Head, branch
A changeset with no descendants on the same named branch.
Head, closed branch
A changeset that marks a head as no longer interesting.
The closed head is no longer listed by hg heads. A branch
is considered closed when all its heads are closed and
consequently is not listed by hg branches.
Closed heads can be re-opened by committing new changeset
as the child of the changeset that marks a head as closed.
Head, repository
A topological head which has not been closed.
Head, topological
A changeset with no children in the repository.
History, immutable
Once committed, changesets cannot be altered. Extensions
which appear to change history actually create new
changesets that replace existing ones, and then destroy
the old changesets. Doing so in public repositories can
result in old changesets being reintroduced to the
repository.
History, rewriting
The changesets in a repository are immutable. However,
extensions to Mercurial can be used to alter the
repository, usually in such a way as to preserve changeset
contents.
Immutable history
See 'History, immutable'.
Merge changeset
See 'Changeset, merge'.
Manifest
Each changeset has a manifest, which is the list of files
that are tracked by the changeset.
Merge Used to bring together divergent branches of work. When
you update to a changeset and then merge another
changeset, you bring the history of the latter changeset
into your working directory. Once conflicts are resolved
(and marked), this merge may be committed as a merge
changeset, bringing two branches together in the DAG.
Named branch
See 'Branch, named'.
Null changeset
The empty changeset. It is the parent state of
newly-initialized repositories and repositories with no
checked out revision. It is thus the parent of root
changesets and the effective ancestor when merging
unrelated changesets. Can be specified by the alias 'null'
or by the changeset ID '000000000000'.
Parent See 'Changeset, parent'.
Parent changeset
See 'Changeset, parent'.
Parent, working directory
The working directory parent reflects a virtual revision
which is the child of the changeset (or two changesets
with an uncommitted merge) shown by hg parents. This is
changed with hg update. Other commands to see the working
directory parent are hg summary and hg id. Can be
specified by the alias ".".
Patch (Noun) The product of a diff operation.
Example: "I've sent you my patch."
(Verb) The process of using a patch file to transform one
changeset into another.
Example: "You will need to patch that revision."
Phase A per-changeset state tracking how the changeset has been
or should be shared. See hg help phases.
Public Changesets in the public phase have been shared with
publishing repositories and are therefore considered
immutable. See hg help phases.
Pull An operation in which changesets in a remote repository
which are not in the local repository are brought into the
local repository. Note that this operation without special
arguments only updates the repository, it does not update
the files in the working directory. See hg help pull.
Push An operation in which changesets in a local repository
which are not in a remote repository are sent to the
remote repository. Note that this operation only adds
changesets which have been committed locally to the remote
repository. Uncommitted changes are not sent. See hg help
push.
Repository
The metadata describing all recorded states of a
collection of files. Each recorded state is represented by
a changeset. A repository is usually (but not always)
found in the .hg subdirectory of a working directory. Any
recorded state can be recreated by "updating" a working
directory to a specific changeset.
Repository head
See 'Head, repository'.
Revision
A state of the repository at some point in time. Earlier
revisions can be updated to by using hg update. See also
'Revision number'; See also 'Changeset'.
Revision number
This integer uniquely identifies a changeset in a specific
repository. It represents the order in which changesets
were added to a repository, starting with revision number
0. Note that the revision number may be different in each
clone of a repository. To identify changesets uniquely
between different clones, see 'Changeset id'.
Revlog History storage mechanism used by Mercurial. It is a form
of delta encoding, with occasional full revision of data
followed by delta of each successive revision. It includes
data and an index pointing to the data.
Rewriting history
See 'History, rewriting'.
Root A changeset that has only the null changeset as its
parent. Most repositories have only a single root
changeset.
Secret Changesets in the secret phase may not be shared via push,
pull, or clone. See hg help phases.
Tag An alternative name given to a changeset. Tags can be used
in all places where Mercurial expects a changeset ID,
e.g., with hg update. The creation of a tag is stored in
the history and will thus automatically be shared with
other using push and pull.
Tip The changeset with the highest revision number. It is the
changeset most recently added in a repository.
Tip, branch
The head of a given branch with the highest revision
number. When a branch name is used as a revision
identifier, it refers to the branch tip. See also 'Branch,
head'. Note that because revision numbers may be different
in different repository clones, the branch tip may be
different in different cloned repositories.
Update (Noun) Another synonym of changeset.
Example: "I've pushed an update."
(Verb) This term is usually used to describe updating the
state of the working directory to that of a specific
changeset. See hg help update.
Example: "You should update."
Working directory
See 'Directory, working'.
Working directory parent
See 'Parent, working directory'.
Synopsis
The Mercurial system uses a file called .hgignore in the root
directory of a repository to control its behavior when it
searches for files that it is not currently tracking.
Description
The working directory of a Mercurial repository will often
contain files that should not be tracked by Mercurial. These
include backup files created by editors and build products
created by compilers. These files can be ignored by listing them
in a .hgignore file in the root of the working directory. The
.hgignore file must be created manually. It is typically put
under version control, so that the settings will propagate to
other repositories with push and pull.
An untracked file is ignored if its path relative to the
repository root directory, or any prefix path of that path, is
matched against any pattern in .hgignore.
For example, say we have an untracked file, file.c, at a/b/file.c
inside our repository. Mercurial will ignore file.c if any
pattern in .hgignore matches a/b/file.c, a/b or a.
In addition, a Mercurial configuration file can reference a set
of per-user or global ignore files. See the ignore configuration
key on the [ui] section of hg help config for details of how to
configure these files.
To control Mercurial's handling of files that it manages, many
commands support the -I and -X options; see hg help <command> and
hg help patterns for details.
Files that are already tracked are not affected by .hgignore,
even if they appear in .hgignore. An untracked file X can be
explicitly added with hg add X, even if X would be excluded by a
pattern in .hgignore.
Syntax
An ignore file is a plain text file consisting of a list of
patterns, with one pattern per line. Empty lines are skipped. The
# character is treated as a comment character, and the \
character is treated as an escape character.
Mercurial supports several pattern syntaxes. The default syntax
used is Python/Perl-style regular expressions.
To change the syntax used, use a line of the following form:
syntax: NAME
where NAME is one of the following:
regexp
Regular expression, Python/Perl syntax.
glob
Shell-style glob.
rootglob
A variant of glob that is rooted (see below).
The chosen syntax stays in effect when parsing all patterns that
follow, until another syntax is selected.
Neither glob nor regexp patterns are rooted. A glob-syntax
pattern of the form *.c will match a file ending in .c in any
directory, and a regexp pattern of the form \.c$ will do the
same. To root a regexp pattern, start it with ^. To get the same
effect with glob-syntax, you have to use rootglob.
Subdirectories can have their own .hgignore settings by adding
subinclude:path/to/subdir/.hgignore to the root .hgignore. See hg
help patterns for details on subinclude: and include:.
Note Patterns specified in other than .hgignore are always
rooted. Please see hg help patterns for details.
Example
Here is an example ignore file.
# use glob syntax.
syntax: glob
*.elc
*.pyc
*~
# switch to regexp syntax.
syntax: regexp
^\.pc/
Debugging
Use the debugignore command to see if and why a file is ignored,
or to see the combined ignore pattern. See hg help debugignore
for details.
Mercurial's internal web server, hgweb, can serve either a single
repository, or a tree of repositories. In the second case,
repository paths and global options can be defined using a
dedicated configuration file common to hg serve, hgweb.wsgi,
hgweb.cgi and hgweb.fcgi.
This file uses the same syntax as other Mercurial configuration
files but recognizes only the following sections:
• web
• paths
• collections
The web options are thoroughly described in hg help config.
The paths section maps URL paths to paths of repositories in the
filesystem. hgweb will not expose the filesystem directly - only
Mercurial repositories can be published and only according to the
configuration.
The left hand side is the path in the URL. Note that hgweb
reserves subpaths like rev or file, try using different names for
nested repositories to avoid confusing effects.
The right hand side is the path in the filesystem. If the
specified path ends with * or ** the filesystem will be searched
recursively for repositories below that point. With * it will
not recurse into the repositories it finds (except for
.hg/patches). With ** it will also search inside repository
working directories and possibly find subrepositories.
In this example:
[paths]
/projects/a = /srv/tmprepos/a
/projects/b = c:/repos/b
/ = /srv/repos/*
/user/bob = /home/bob/repos/**
• The first two entries make two repositories in different
directories appear under the same directory in the web
interface
• The third entry will publish every Mercurial repository found
in /srv/repos/, for instance the repository /srv/repos/quux/
will appear as http://server/quux/
• The fourth entry will publish both http://server/user/bob/quux/
and http://server/user/bob/quux/testsubrepo/
The collections section is deprecated and has been superseded by
paths.
URLs and Common Arguments
URLs under each repository have the form /{command}[/{arguments}]
where {command} represents the name of a command or handler and
{arguments} represents any number of additional URL parameters to
that command.
The web server has a default style associated with it. Styles map
to a collection of named templates. Each template is used to
render a specific piece of data, such as a changeset or diff.
The style for the current request can be overridden two ways.
First, if {command} contains a hyphen (-), the text before the
hyphen defines the style. For example, /atom-log will render the
log command handler with the atom style. The second way to set
the style is with the style query string argument. For example,
/log?style=atom. The hyphenated URL parameter is preferred.
Not all templates are available for all styles. Attempting to use
a style that doesn't have all templates defined may result in an
error rendering the page.
Many commands take a {revision} URL parameter. This defines the
changeset to operate on. This is commonly specified as the short,
12 digit hexadecimal abbreviation for the full 40 character
unique revision identifier. However, any value described by hg
help revisions typically works.
Commands and URLs
The following web commands and their URLs are available:
/annotate/{revision}/{path}
Show changeset information for each line in a file.
The ignorews, ignorewsamount, ignorewseol, and ignoreblanklines
query string arguments have the same meaning as their [annotate]
config equivalents. It uses the hgrc boolean parsing logic to
interpret the value. e.g. 0 and false are false and 1 and true
are true. If not defined, the server default settings are used.
The fileannotate template is rendered.
/archive/{revision}.{format}[/{path}]
Obtain an archive of repository content.
The content and type of the archive is defined by a URL path
parameter. format is the file extension of the archive type to
be generated. e.g. zip or tar.bz2. Not all archive types may be
allowed by your server configuration.
The optional path URL parameter controls content to include in
the archive. If omitted, every file in the specified revision is
present in the archive. If included, only the specified file or
contents of the specified directory will be included in the
archive.
No template is used for this handler. Raw, binary content is
generated.
/bookmarks
Show information about bookmarks.
No arguments are accepted.
The bookmarks template is rendered.
/branches
Show information about branches.
All known branches are contained in the output, even closed
branches.
No arguments are accepted.
The branches template is rendered.
/changelog[/{revision}]
Show information about multiple changesets.
If the optional revision URL argument is absent, information
about all changesets starting at tip will be rendered. If the
revision argument is present, changesets will be shown starting
from the specified revision.
If revision is absent, the rev query string argument may be
defined. This will perform a search for changesets.
The argument for rev can be a single revision, a revision set, or
a literal keyword to search for in changeset data (equivalent to
hg log -k).
The revcount query string argument defines the maximum numbers of
changesets to render.
For non-searches, the changelog template will be rendered.
/changeset[/{revision}]
Show information about a single changeset.
A URL path argument is the changeset identifier to show. See hg
help revisions for possible values. If not defined, the tip
changeset will be shown.
The changeset template is rendered. Contents of the changesettag,
changesetbookmark, filenodelink, filenolink, and the many
templates related to diffs may all be used to produce the output.
/comparison/{revision}/{path}
Show a comparison between the old and new versions of a file from
changes made on a particular revision.
This is similar to the diff handler. However, this form features
a split or side-by-side diff rather than a unified diff.
The context query string argument can be used to control the
lines of context in the diff.
The filecomparison template is rendered.
/diff/{revision}/{path}
Show how a file changed in a particular commit.
The filediff template is rendered.
This handler is registered under both the /diff and /filediff
paths. /diff is used in modern code.
/file/{revision}[/{path}]
Show information about a directory or file in the repository.
Info about the path given as a URL parameter will be rendered.
If path is a directory, information about the entries in that
directory will be rendered. This form is equivalent to the
manifest handler.
If path is a file, information about that file will be shown via
the filerevision template.
If path is not defined, information about the root directory will
be rendered.
/diff/{revision}/{path}
Show how a file changed in a particular commit.
The filediff template is rendered.
This handler is registered under both the /diff and /filediff
paths. /diff is used in modern code.
/filelog/{revision}/{path}
Show information about the history of a file in the repository.
The revcount query string argument can be defined to control the
maximum number of entries to show.
The filelog template will be rendered.
/graph[/{revision}]
Show information about the graphical topology of the repository.
Information rendered by this handler can be used to create visual
representations of repository topology.
The revision URL parameter controls the starting changeset. If
it's absent, the default is tip.
The revcount query string argument can define the number of
changesets to show information for.
The graphtop query string argument can specify the starting
changeset for producing jsdata variable that is used for
rendering graph in JavaScript. By default it has the same value
as revision.
This handler will render the graph template.
/help[/{topic}]
Render help documentation.
This web command is roughly equivalent to hg help. If a topic is
defined, that help topic will be rendered. If not, an index of
available help topics will be rendered.
The help template will be rendered when requesting help for a
topic. helptopics will be rendered for the index of help topics.
/log[/{revision}[/{path}]]
Show repository or file history.
For URLs of the form /log/{revision}, a list of changesets
starting at the specified changeset identifier is shown. If
{revision} is not defined, the default is tip. This form is
equivalent to the changelog handler.
For URLs of the form /log/{revision}/{file}, the history for a
specific file will be shown. This form is equivalent to the
filelog handler.
/manifest[/{revision}[/{path}]]
Show information about a directory.
If the URL path arguments are omitted, information about the root
directory for the tip changeset will be shown.
Because this handler can only show information for directories,
it is recommended to use the file handler instead, as it can
handle both directories and files.
The manifest template will be rendered for this handler.
/changeset[/{revision}]
Show information about a single changeset.
A URL path argument is the changeset identifier to show. See hg
help revisions for possible values. If not defined, the tip
changeset will be shown.
The changeset template is rendered. Contents of the changesettag,
changesetbookmark, filenodelink, filenolink, and the many
templates related to diffs may all be used to produce the output.
/shortlog
Show basic information about a set of changesets.
This accepts the same parameters as the changelog handler. The
only difference is the shortlog template will be rendered instead
of the changelog template.
/summary
Show a summary of repository state.
Information about the latest changesets, bookmarks, tags, and
branches is captured by this handler.
The summary template is rendered.
/tags
Show information about tags.
No arguments are accepted.
The tags template is rendered.
To access a subtopic, use "hg help internals.{subtopic-name}"
bid-merge
Bid Merge Algorithm
bundle2
Bundle2
bundles
Bundles
cbor CBOR
censor Censor
changegroups
Changegroups
config Config Registrar
dirstate-v2
dirstate-v2 file format
extensions
Extension API
mergestate
Mergestate
requirements
Repository Requirements
revlogs
Revision Logs
wireprotocol
Wire Protocol
wireprotocolrpc
Wire Protocol RPC
wireprotocolv2
Wire Protocol Version 2
To merge files Mercurial uses merge tools.
A merge tool combines two different versions of a file into a
merged file. Merge tools are given the two files and the greatest
common ancestor of the two file versions, so they can determine
the changes made on both branches.
Merge tools are used both for hg resolve, hg merge, hg update, hg
backout and in several extensions.
Usually, the merge tool tries to automatically reconcile the
files by combining all non-overlapping changes that occurred
separately in the two different evolutions of the same initial
base file. Furthermore, some interactive merge programs make it
easier to manually resolve conflicting merges, either in a
graphical way, or by inserting some conflict markers. Mercurial
does not include any interactive merge programs but relies on
external tools for that.
Available merge tools
External merge tools and their properties are configured in the
merge-tools configuration section - see hgrc(5) - but they can
often just be named by their executable.
A merge tool is generally usable if its executable can be found
on the system and if it can handle the merge. The executable is
found if it is an absolute or relative executable path or the
name of an application in the executable search path. The tool is
assumed to be able to handle the merge if it can handle symlinks
if the file is a symlink, if it can handle binary files if the
file is binary, and if a GUI is available if the tool requires a
GUI.
There are some internal merge tools which can be used. The
internal merge tools are:
:dump
Creates three versions of the files to merge, containing
the contents of local, other and base. These files can
then be used to perform a merge manually. If the file to
be merged is named a.txt, these files will accordingly be
named a.txt.local, a.txt.other and a.txt.base and they
will be placed in the same directory as a.txt.
This implies premerge. Therefore, files aren't dumped, if
premerge runs successfully. Use :forcedump to forcibly
write files out.
(actual capabilities: binary, symlink)
:fail
Rather than attempting to merge files that were modified
on both branches, it marks them as unresolved. The resolve
command must be used to resolve these conflicts.
(actual capabilities: binary, symlink)
:forcedump
Creates three versions of the files as same as :dump, but
omits premerge.
(actual capabilities: binary, symlink)
:local
Uses the local p1() version of files as the merged
version.
(actual capabilities: binary, symlink)
:merge
Uses the internal non-interactive simple merge algorithm
for merging files. It will fail if there are any conflicts
and leave markers in the partially merged file. Markers
will have two sections, one for each side of merge.
:merge-local
Like :merge, but resolve all conflicts non-interactively
in favor of the local p1() changes.
:merge-other
Like :merge, but resolve all conflicts non-interactively
in favor of the other p2() changes.
:merge3
Uses the internal non-interactive simple merge algorithm
for merging files. It will fail if there are any conflicts
and leave markers in the partially merged file. Marker
will have three sections, one from each side of the merge
and one for the base content.
:mergediff
Uses the internal non-interactive simple merge algorithm
for merging files. It will fail if there are any conflicts
and leave markers in the partially merged file. The marker
will have two sections, one with the content from one side
of the merge, and one with a diff from the base content to
the content on the other side. (experimental)
:other
Uses the other p2() version of files as the merged
version.
(actual capabilities: binary, symlink)
:prompt
Asks the user which of the local p1() or the other p2()
version to keep as the merged version.
(actual capabilities: binary, symlink)
:tagmerge
Uses the internal tag merge algorithm (experimental).
:union
Uses the internal non-interactive simple merge algorithm
for merging files. It will use both left and right sides
for conflict regions. No markers are inserted.
Internal tools are always available and do not require a GUI but
will by default not handle symlinks or binary files. See next
section for detail about "actual capabilities" described above.
Choosing a merge tool
Mercurial uses these rules when deciding which merge tool to use:
1. If a tool has been specified with the --tool option to merge
or resolve, it is used. If it is the name of a tool in the
merge-tools configuration, its configuration is used.
Otherwise the specified tool must be executable by the shell.
2. If the HGMERGE environment variable is present, its value is
used and must be executable by the shell.
3. If the filename of the file to be merged matches any of the
patterns in the merge-patterns configuration section, the
first usable merge tool corresponding to a matching pattern is
used.
4. If ui.merge is set it will be considered next. If the value is
not the name of a configured tool, the specified value is used
and must be executable by the shell. Otherwise the named tool
is used if it is usable.
5. If any usable merge tools are present in the merge-tools
configuration section, the one with the highest priority is
used.
6. If a program named hgmerge can be found on the system, it is
used - but it will by default not be used for symlinks and
binary files.
7. If the file to be merged is not binary and is not a symlink,
then internal :merge is used.
8. Otherwise, :prompt is used.
For historical reason, Mercurial treats merge tools as below
while examining rules above.
┌────────────┬────────────────┬────────┬─────────┐
│ step │ specified via │ binary │ symlink │
├────────────┼────────────────┼────────┼─────────┤
│ │ --tool │ o/o │ o/o │
│ 1. │ │ │ │
├────────────┼────────────────┼────────┼─────────┤
│ │ HGMERGE │ o/o │ o/o │
│ 2. │ │ │ │
├────────────┼────────────────┼────────┼─────────┤
│ │ merge-patterns │ o/o(*) │ x/?(*) │
│ 3. │ │ │ │
├────────────┼────────────────┼────────┼─────────┤
│ │ ui.merge │ x/?(*) │ x/?(*) │
│ 4. │ │ │ │
└────────────┴────────────────┴────────┴─────────┘
Each capability column indicates Mercurial behavior for
internal/external merge tools at examining each rule.
• "o": "assume that a tool has capability"
• "x": "assume that a tool does not have capability"
• "?": "check actual capability of a tool"
If merge.strict-capability-check configuration is true, Mercurial
checks capabilities of merge tools strictly in (*) cases above (=
each capability column becomes "?/?"). It is false by default for
backward compatibility.
Note After selecting a merge program, Mercurial will by default
attempt to merge the files using a simple merge algorithm
first. Only if it doesn't succeed because of conflicting
changes will Mercurial actually execute the merge program.
Whether to use the simple merge algorithm first can be
controlled by the premerge setting of the merge tool.
Premerge is enabled by default unless the file is binary
or a symlink.
See the merge-tools and ui sections of hgrc(5) for details on the
configuration of merge tools.
Some Mercurial commands can produce a lot of output, and
Mercurial will attempt to use a pager to make those commands more
pleasant.
To set the pager that should be used, set the application
variable:
[pager]
pager = less -FRX
If no pager is set in the user or repository configuration,
Mercurial uses the environment variable $PAGER. If $PAGER is not
set, pager.pager from the default or system configuration is
used. If none of these are set, a default pager will be used,
typically less on Unix and more on Windows.
On Windows, more is not color aware, so using it effectively
disables color. MSYS and Cygwin shells provide less as a pager,
which can be configured to support ANSI color codes. See hg help
config.color.pagermode to configure the color mode when invoking
a pager.
You can disable the pager for certain commands by adding them to
the pager.ignore list:
[pager]
ignore = version, help, update
To ignore global commands like hg version or hg help, you have to
specify them in your user configuration file.
To control whether the pager is used at all for an individual
command, you can use --pager=<value>:
• use as needed: auto.
• require the pager: yes or on.
• suppress the pager: no or off (any unrecognized value will
also work).
To globally turn off all attempts to use a pager, set:
[ui]
paginate = never
which will prevent the pager from running.
Mercurial accepts several notations for identifying one or more
files at a time.
By default, Mercurial treats filenames verbatim without pattern
matching, relative to the current working directory. Note that
your system shell might perform pattern matching of its own
before passing filenames into Mercurial.
Alternate pattern notations must be specified explicitly.
Note Patterns specified in .hgignore are not rooted. Please
see hg help hgignore for details.
To use a plain path name without any pattern matching, start it
with path:. These path names must completely match starting at
the current repository root, and when the path points to a
directory, it is matched recursively. To match all files in a
directory non-recursively (not including any files in
subdirectories), rootfilesin: can be used, specifying an absolute
path (relative to the repository root).
To use an extended glob, start a name with glob:. Globs are
rooted at the current directory; a glob such as *.c will only
match files in the current directory ending with .c. rootglob:
can be used instead of glob: for a glob that is rooted at the
root of the repository.
The supported glob syntax extensions are ** to match any string
across path separators and {a,b} to mean "a or b".
To use a Perl/Python regular expression, start a name with re:.
Regexp pattern matching is anchored at the root of the
repository.
To read name patterns from a file, use listfile: or listfile0:.
The latter expects null delimited patterns while the former
expects line feeds. Each string read from the file is itself
treated as a file pattern.
To read a set of patterns from a file, use include: or
subinclude:. include: will use all the patterns from the given
file and treat them as if they had been passed in manually.
subinclude: will only apply the patterns against files that are
under the subinclude file's directory. See hg help hgignore for
details on the format of these files.
All patterns, except for glob: specified in command line (not for
-I or -X options), can match also against directories: files
under matched directories are treated as matched. For -I and -X
options, glob: will match directories recursively.
Plain examples:
path:foo/bar a name bar in a directory named foo in the root
of the repository
path:path:name a file or directory named "path:name"
rootfilesin:foo/bar the files in a directory called foo/bar, but not any files
in its subdirectories and not a file bar in directory foo
Glob examples:
glob:*.c any name ending in ".c" in the current directory
*.c any name ending in ".c" in the current directory
**.c any name ending in ".c" in any subdirectory of the
current directory including itself.
foo/* any file in directory foo
foo/** any file in directory foo plus all its subdirectories,
recursively
foo/*.c any name ending in ".c" in the directory foo
foo/**.c any name ending in ".c" in any subdirectory of foo
including itself.
rootglob:*.c any name ending in ".c" in the root of the repository
Regexp examples:
re:.*\.c$ any name ending in ".c", anywhere in the repository
File examples:
listfile:list.txt read list from list.txt with one file pattern per line
listfile0:list.txt read list from list.txt with null byte delimiters
See also hg help filesets.
Include examples:
include:path/to/mypatternfile reads patterns to be applied to all paths
subinclude:path/to/subignorefile reads patterns specifically for paths in the
subdirectory
What are phases?
Phases are a system for tracking which changesets have been or
should be shared. This helps prevent common mistakes when
modifying history (for instance, with the mq or rebase
extensions).
Each changeset in a repository is in one of the following phases:
• public : changeset is visible on a public server
• draft : changeset is not yet published
• secret : changeset should not be pushed, pulled, or cloned
These phases are ordered (public < draft < secret) and no
changeset can be in a lower phase than its ancestors. For
instance, if a changeset is public, all its ancestors are also
public. Lastly, changeset phases should only be changed towards
the public phase.
How are phases managed?
For the most part, phases should work transparently. By default,
a changeset is created in the draft phase and is moved into the
public phase when it is pushed to another repository.
Once changesets become public, extensions like mq and rebase will
refuse to operate on them to prevent creating duplicate
changesets. Phases can also be manually manipulated with the hg
phase command if needed. See hg help -v phase for examples.
To make your commits secret by default, put this in your
configuration file:
[phases]
new-commit = secret
Phases and servers
Normally, all servers are publishing by default. This means:
- all draft changesets that are pulled or cloned appear in phase
public on the client
- all draft changesets that are pushed appear as public on both
client and server
- secret changesets are neither pushed, pulled, or cloned
Note Pulling a draft changeset from a publishing server does
not mark it as public on the server side due to the
read-only nature of pull.
Sometimes it may be desirable to push and pull changesets in the
draft phase to share unfinished work. This can be done by setting
a repository to disable publishing in its configuration file:
[phases]
publish = False
See hg help config for more information on configuration files.
Note Servers running older versions of Mercurial are treated as
publishing.
Note Changesets in secret phase are not exchanged with the
server. This applies to their content: file names, file
contents, and changeset metadata. For technical reasons,
the identifier (e.g. d825e4025e39) of the secret changeset
may be communicated to the server.
Examples
• list changesets in draft or secret phase:
hg log -r "not public()"
• change all secret changesets to draft:
hg phase --draft "secret()"
• forcibly move the current changeset and descendants from
public to draft:
hg phase --force --draft .
• show a list of changeset revisions and each corresponding
phase:
hg log --template "{rev} {phase}\n"
• resynchronize draft changesets relative to a remote
repository:
hg phase -fd "outgoing(URL)"
See hg help phase for more information on manually manipulating
phases.
Mercurial supports several ways to specify revisions.
Specifying single revisions
A plain integer is treated as a revision number. Negative
integers are treated as sequential offsets from the tip, with -1
denoting the tip, -2 denoting the revision prior to the tip, and
so forth.
A 40-digit hexadecimal string is treated as a unique revision
identifier. A hexadecimal string less than 40 characters long is
treated as a unique revision identifier and is referred to as a
short-form identifier. A short-form identifier is only valid if
it is the prefix of exactly one full-length identifier.
Any other string is treated as a bookmark, tag, or branch name. A
bookmark is a movable pointer to a revision. A tag is a permanent
name associated with a revision. A branch name denotes the
tipmost open branch head of that branch - or if they are all
closed, the tipmost closed head of the branch. Bookmark, tag, and
branch names must not contain the ":" character.
The reserved name "tip" always identifies the most recent
revision.
The reserved name "null" indicates the null revision. This is the
revision of an empty repository, and the parent of revision 0.
The reserved name "." indicates the working directory parent. If
no working directory is checked out, it is equivalent to null. If
an uncommitted merge is in progress, "." is the revision of the
first parent.
Finally, commands that expect a single revision (like hg update)
also accept revsets (see below for details). When given a revset,
they use the last revision of the revset. A few commands accept
two single revisions (like hg diff). When given a revset, they
use the first and the last revisions of the revset.
Specifying multiple revisions
Mercurial supports a functional language for selecting a set of
revisions. Expressions in this language are called revsets.
The language supports a number of predicates which are joined by
infix operators. Parenthesis can be used for grouping.
Identifiers such as branch names may need quoting with single or
double quotes if they contain characters like - or if they match
one of the predefined predicates.
Special characters can be used in quoted identifiers by escaping
them, e.g., \n is interpreted as a newline. To prevent them from
being interpreted, strings can be prefixed with r, e.g. r'...'.
Operators
There is a single prefix operator:
not x
Changesets not in x. Short form is ! x.
These are the supported infix operators:
x::y
A DAG range, meaning all changesets that are descendants
of x and ancestors of y, including x and y themselves. If
the first endpoint is left out, this is equivalent to
ancestors(y), if the second is left out it is equivalent
to descendants(x).
An alternative syntax is x..y.
x:y
All changesets with revision numbers between x and y, both
inclusive. Either endpoint can be left out, they default
to 0 and tip.
x and y
The intersection of changesets in x and y. Short form is x
& y.
x or y
The union of changesets in x and y. There are two
alternative short forms: x | y and x + y.
x - y
Changesets in x but not in y.
x % y
Changesets that are ancestors of x but not ancestors of y
(i.e. ::x - ::y). This is shorthand notation for only(x,
y) (see below). The second argument is optional and, if
left out, is equivalent to only(x).
x^n
The nth parent of x, n == 0, 1, or 2. For n == 0, x; for
n == 1, the first parent of each changeset in x; for n ==
2, the second parent of changeset in x.
x~n
The nth first ancestor of x; x~0 is x; x~3 is x^^^. For n
< 0, the nth unambiguous descendent of x.
x ## y
Concatenate strings and identifiers into one string.
All other prefix, infix and postfix operators have lower
priority than ##. For example, a1 ## a2~2 is equivalent to
(a1 ## a2)~2.
For example:
[revsetalias]
issue(a1) = grep(r'\bissue[ :]?' ## a1 ## r'\b|\bbug\(' ## a1 ## r'\)')
issue(1234) is equivalent to grep(r'\bissue[
:]?1234\b|\bbug\(1234\)') in this case. This matches
against all of "issue 1234", "issue:1234", "issue1234" and
"bug(1234)".
There is a single postfix operator:
x^
Equivalent to x^1, the first parent of each changeset in
x.
Patterns
Where noted, predicates that perform string matching can accept a
pattern string. The pattern may be either a literal, or a regular
expression. If the pattern starts with re:, the remainder of the
pattern is treated as a regular expression. Otherwise, it is
treated as a literal. To match a pattern that actually starts
with re:, use the prefix literal:.
Matching is case-sensitive, unless otherwise noted. To perform a
case- insensitive match on a case-sensitive predicate, use a
regular expression, prefixed with (?i).
For example, tag(r're:(?i)release') matches "release" or
"RELEASE" or "Release", etc.
Predicates
The following predicates are supported:
adds(pattern)
Changesets that add a file matching pattern.
The pattern without explicit kind like glob: is expected
to be relative to the current directory and match against
a file or a directory.
all()
All changesets, the same as 0:tip.
ancestor(*changeset)
A greatest common ancestor of the changesets.
Accepts 0 or more changesets. Will return empty list when
passed no args. Greatest common ancestor of a single
changeset is that changeset.
ancestors(set[, depth])
Changesets that are ancestors of changesets in set,
including the given changesets themselves.
If depth is specified, the result only includes changesets
up to the specified generation.
author(string)
Alias for user(string).
bisect(string)
Changesets marked in the specified bisect status:
• good, bad, skip: csets explicitly marked as
good/bad/skip
• goods, bads : csets topologically good/bad
• range : csets taking part in the bisection
• pruned : csets that are goods, bads or
skipped
• untested : csets whose fate is yet unknown
• ignored : csets ignored due to DAG topology
• current : the cset currently being bisected
bookmark([name])
The named bookmark or all bookmarks.
Pattern matching is supported for name. See hg help
revisions.patterns.
branch(string or set)
All changesets belonging to the given branch or the
branches of the given changesets.
Pattern matching is supported for string. See hg help
revisions.patterns.
branchpoint()
Changesets with more than one child.
bundle()
Changesets in the bundle.
Bundle must be specified by the -R option.
children(set)
Child changesets of changesets in set.
closed()
Changeset is closed.
commonancestors(set)
Changesets that are ancestors of every changeset in set.
conflictlocal()
The local side of the merge, if currently in an unresolved
merge.
"merge" here includes merge conflicts from e.g. 'hg
rebase' or 'hg graft'.
conflictother()
The other side of the merge, if currently in an unresolved
merge.
"merge" here includes merge conflicts from e.g. 'hg
rebase' or 'hg graft'.
contains(pattern)
The revision's manifest contains a file matching pattern
(but might not modify it). See hg help patterns for
information about file patterns.
The pattern without explicit kind like glob: is expected
to be relative to the current directory and match against
a file exactly for efficiency.
converted([id])
Changesets converted from the given identifier in the old
repository if present, or all converted changesets if no
identifier is specified.
date(interval)
Changesets within the interval, see hg help dates.
desc(string)
Search commit message for string. The match is
case-insensitive.
Pattern matching is supported for string. See hg help
revisions.patterns.
descendants(set[, depth])
Changesets which are descendants of changesets in set,
including the given changesets themselves.
If depth is specified, the result only includes changesets
up to the specified generation.
destination([set])
Changesets that were created by a graft, transplant or
rebase operation, with the given revisions specified as
the source. Omitting the optional set is the same as
passing all().
diffcontains(pattern)
Search revision differences for when the pattern was added
or removed.
The pattern may be a substring literal or a regular
expression. See hg help revisions.patterns.
draft()
Changeset in draft phase.
expectsize(set[, size])
Return the given revset if size matches the revset size.
Abort if the revset doesn't expect given size. size can
either be an integer range or an integer.
For example, expectsize(0:1, 3:5) will abort as revset
size is 2 and 2 is not between 3 and 5 inclusive.
extra(label, [value])
Changesets with the given label in the extra metadata,
with the given optional value.
Pattern matching is supported for value. See hg help
revisions.patterns.
file(pattern)
Changesets affecting files matched by pattern.
For a faster but less accurate result, consider using
filelog() instead.
This predicate uses glob: as the default kind of pattern.
filelog(pattern)
Changesets connected to the specified filelog.
For performance reasons, visits only revisions mentioned
in the file-level filelog, rather than filtering through
all changesets (much faster, but doesn't include deletes
or duplicate changes). For a slower, more accurate result,
use file().
The pattern without explicit kind like glob: is expected
to be relative to the current directory and match against
a file exactly for efficiency.
first(set, [n])
An alias for limit().
follow([file[, startrev]])
An alias for ::. (ancestors of the working directory's
first parent). If file pattern is specified, the
histories of files matching given pattern in the revision
given by startrev are followed, including copies.
followlines(file, fromline:toline[, startrev=., descend=False])
Changesets modifying file in line range ('fromline',
'toline').
Line range corresponds to 'file' content at 'startrev' and
should hence be consistent with file size. If startrev is
not specified, working directory's parent is used.
By default, ancestors of 'startrev' are returned. If
'descend' is True, descendants of 'startrev' are returned
though renames are (currently) not followed in this
direction.
grep(regex)
Like keyword(string) but accepts a regex. Use grep(r'...')
to ensure special escape characters are handled correctly.
Unlike keyword(string), the match is case-sensitive.
head()
Changeset is a named branch head.
heads(set)
Members of set with no children in set.
hidden()
Hidden changesets.
id(string)
Revision non-ambiguously specified by the given hex string
prefix.
keyword(string)
Search commit message, user name, and names of changed
files for string. The match is case-insensitive.
For a regular expression or case sensitive search of these
fields, use grep(regex).
last(set, [n])
Last n members of set, defaulting to 1.
limit(set[, n[, offset]])
First n members of set, defaulting to 1, starting from
offset.
matching(revision [, field])
Changesets in which a given set of fields match the set of
fields in the selected revision or set.
To match more than one field pass the list of fields to
match separated by spaces (e.g. author description).
Valid fields are most regular revision fields and some
special fields.
Regular revision fields are description, author, branch,
date, files, phase, parents, substate, user and diff.
Note that author and user are synonyms. diff refers to the
contents of the revision. Two revisions matching their
diff will also match their files.
Special fields are summary and metadata: summary matches
the first line of the description. metadata is equivalent
to matching description user date (i.e. it matches the
main metadata fields).
metadata is the default field which is used when no fields
are specified. You can match more than one field at a
time.
max(set)
Changeset with highest revision number in set.
merge()
Changeset is a merge changeset.
min(set)
Changeset with lowest revision number in set.
modifies(pattern)
Changesets modifying files matched by pattern.
The pattern without explicit kind like glob: is expected
to be relative to the current directory and match against
a file or a directory.
named(namespace)
The changesets in a given namespace.
Pattern matching is supported for namespace. See hg help
revisions.patterns.
nodefromfile(path)
Read a list of nodes from the file at path.
This applies id(LINE) to each line of the file.
This is useful when the amount of nodes you need to
specify gets too large for the command line.
none()
No changesets.
only(set, [set])
Changesets that are ancestors of the first set that are
not ancestors of any other head in the repo. If a second
set is specified, the result is ancestors of the first set
that are not ancestors of the second set (i.e. ::<set1> -
::<set2>).
origin([set])
Changesets that were specified as a source for the grafts,
transplants or rebases that created the given revisions.
Omitting the optional set is the same as passing all().
If a changeset created by these operations is itself
specified as a source for one of these operations, only
the source changeset for the first operation is selected.
outgoing([path])
Changesets not found in the specified destination
repository, or the default push location.
If the location resolve to multiple repositories, the
union of all outgoing changeset will be used.
p1([set])
First parent of changesets in set, or the working
directory.
p2([set])
Second parent of changesets in set, or the working
directory.
parents([set])
The set of all parents for all changesets in set, or the
working directory.
present(set)
An empty set, if any revision in set isn't found;
otherwise, all revisions in set.
If any of specified revisions is not present in the local
repository, the query is normally aborted. But this
predicate allows the query to continue even in such cases.
public()
Changeset in public phase.
remote([id [,path]])
Local revision that corresponds to the given identifier in
a remote repository, if present. Here, the '.' identifier
is a synonym for the current local branch.
removes(pattern)
Changesets which remove files matching pattern.
The pattern without explicit kind like glob: is expected
to be relative to the current directory and match against
a file or a directory.
rev(number)
Revision with the given numeric identifier.
reverse(set)
Reverse order of set.
revset(set)
Strictly interpret the content as a revset.
The content of this special predicate will be strictly
interpreted as a revset. For example, revset(id(0)) will
be interpreted as "id(0)" without possible ambiguity with
a "id(0)" bookmark or tag.
roots(set)
Changesets in set with no parent changeset in set.
secret()
Changeset in secret phase.
sort(set[, [-]key... [, ...]])
Sort set by keys. The default sort order is ascending,
specify a key as -key to sort in descending order.
The keys can be:
• rev for the revision number,
• branch for the branch name,
• desc for the commit message (description),
• user for user name (author can be used as an alias),
• date for the commit date
• topo for a reverse topographical sort
• node the nodeid of the revision
The topo sort order cannot be combined with other sort
keys. This sort takes one optional argument,
topo.firstbranch, which takes a revset that specifies what
topographical branches to prioritize in the sort.
subrepo([pattern])
Changesets that add, modify or remove the given subrepo.
If no subrepo pattern is named, any subrepo changes are
returned.
tag([name])
The specified tag by name, or all tagged revisions if no
name is given.
Pattern matching is supported for name. See hg help
revisions.patterns.
user(string)
User name contains string. The match is case-insensitive.
Pattern matching is supported for string. See hg help
revisions.patterns.
Aliases
New predicates (known as "aliases") can be defined, using any
combination of existing predicates or other aliases. An alias
definition looks like:
<alias> = <definition>
in the revsetalias section of a Mercurial configuration file.
Arguments of the form a1, a2, etc. are substituted from the alias
into the definition.
For example,
[revsetalias]
h = heads()
d(s) = sort(s, date)
rs(s, k) = reverse(sort(s, k))
defines three aliases, h, d, and rs. rs(0:tip, author) is exactly
equivalent to reverse(sort(0:tip, author)).
Equivalents
Command line equivalents for hg log:
-f -> ::.
-d x -> date(x)
-k x -> keyword(x)
-m -> merge()
-u x -> user(x)
-b x -> branch(x)
-P x -> !::x
-l x -> limit(expr, x)
Examples
Some sample queries:
• Changesets on the default branch:
hg log -r "branch(default)"
• Changesets on the default branch since tag 1.5 (excluding
merges):
hg log -r "branch(default) and 1.5:: and not merge()"
• Open branch heads:
hg log -r "head() and not closed()"
• Changesets between tags 1.3 and 1.5 mentioning "bug" that
affect hgext/*:
hg log -r "1.3::1.5 and keyword(bug) and file('hgext/*')"
• Changesets committed in May 2008, sorted by user:
hg log -r "sort(date('May 2008'), user)"
• Changesets mentioning "bug" or "issue" that are not in a tagged
release:
hg log -r "(keyword(bug) or keyword(issue)) and not ancestors(tag())"
• Update to the commit that bookmark @ is pointing to, without
activating the bookmark (this works because the last revision
of the revset is used):
hg update :@
• Show diff between tags 1.3 and 1.5 (this works because the
first and the last revisions of the revset are used):
hg diff -r 1.3::1.5
Mercurial can be augmented with Rust extensions for speeding up
certain operations.
Compatibility
Though the Rust extensions are only tested by the project under
Linux, users of MacOS, FreeBSD and other UNIX-likes have been
using the Rust extensions. Your mileage may vary, but by all
means do give us feedback or signal your interest for better
support.
No Rust extensions are available for Windows at this time.
Features
The following operations are sped up when using Rust:
• discovery of differences between repositories (pull/push)
• nodemap (see hg help config.format.use-persistent-nodemap)
• all commands using the dirstate (status, commit, diff, add,
update, etc.)
• dirstate-v2 (see hg help config.format.use-dirstate-v2)
• iteration over ancestors in a graph
More features are in the works, and improvements on the above
listed are still in progress. For more experimental work see the
"rhg" section.
Checking for Rust
You may already have the Rust extensions depending on how you
install Mercurial:
$ hg debuginstall | grep -i rust
checking Rust extensions (installed)
checking module policy (rust+c-allow)
If those lines don't even exist, you're using an old version of
hg which does not have any Rust extensions yet.
Installing
You will need cargo to be in your $PATH. See the "MSRV" section
for which version to use.
Using pip
Users of pip can install the Rust extensions with the following
command:
$ pip install mercurial --global-option --rust --no-use-pep517
--no-use-pep517 is here to tell pip to preserve backwards
compatibility with the legacy setup.py system. Mercurial has not
yet migrated its complex setup to the new system, so we still
need this to add compiled extensions.
This might take a couple of minutes because you're compiling
everything.
See the "Checking for Rust" section to see if the install
succeeded.
From your distribution
Some distributions are shipping Mercurial with Rust extensions
enabled and pre-compiled (meaning you won't have to install
cargo), or allow you to specify an install flag. Check with your
specific distribution for how to do that, or ask their team to
add support for hg+Rust!
From source
Please refer to the rust/README.rst file in the Mercurial
repository for instructions on how to install from source.
MSRV
The minimum supported Rust version is currently 1.48.0. The
project's policy is to follow the version from Debian stable, to
make the distributions' job easier.
rhg
There exists an experimental pure-Rust version of Mercurial
called rhg with a fallback mechanism for unsupported invocations.
It allows for much faster execution of certain commands while
adding no discernable overhead for the rest.
The only way of trying it out is by building it from source.
Please refer to rust/README.rst in the Mercurial repository.
Contributing
If you would like to help the Rust endeavor, please refer to
rust/README.rst in the Mercurial repository.
It is common for machines (as opposed to humans) to consume
Mercurial. This help topic describes some of the considerations
for interfacing machines with Mercurial.
Choosing an Interface
Machines have a choice of several methods to interface with
Mercurial. These include:
• Executing the hg process
• Querying a HTTP server
• Calling out to a command server
Executing hg processes is very similar to how humans interact
with Mercurial in the shell. It should already be familiar to
you.
hg serve can be used to start a server. By default, this will
start a "hgweb" HTTP server. This HTTP server has support for
machine-readable output, such as JSON. For more, see hg help
hgweb.
hg serve can also start a "command server." Clients can connect
to this server and issue Mercurial commands over a special
protocol. For more details on the command server, including
links to client libraries, see
https://www.mercurial-scm.org/wiki/CommandServer.
hg serve based interfaces (the hgweb and command servers) have
the advantage over simple hg process invocations in that they are
likely more efficient. This is because there is significant
overhead to spawn new Python processes.
Tip If you need to invoke several hg processes in short order
and/or performance is important to you, use of a
server-based interface is highly recommended.
Environment Variables
As documented in hg help environment, various environment
variables influence the operation of Mercurial. The following are
particularly relevant for machines consuming Mercurial:
HGPLAIN
If not set, Mercurial's output could be influenced by
configuration settings that impact its encoding, verbose
mode, localization, etc.
It is highly recommended for machines to set this variable
when invoking hg processes.
HGENCODING
If not set, the locale used by Mercurial will be detected
from the environment. If the determined locale does not
support display of certain characters, Mercurial may
render these character sequences incorrectly (often by
using "?" as a placeholder for invalid characters in the
current locale).
Explicitly setting this environment variable is a good
practice to guarantee consistent results. "utf-8" is a
good choice on UNIX-like environments.
HGRCPATH
If not set, Mercurial will inherit config options from
config files using the process described in hg help config
. This includes inheriting user or system-wide config
files.
When utmost control over the Mercurial configuration is
desired, the value of HGRCPATH can be set to an explicit
file with known good configs. In rare cases, the value can
be set to an empty file or the null device (often
/dev/null) to bypass loading of any user or system config
files. Note that these approaches can have unintended
consequences, as the user and system config files often
define things like the username and extensions that may be
required to interface with a repository.
HGRCSKIPREPO
When set, the .hg/hgrc from repositories are not read.
Note that not reading the repository's configuration can
have unintended consequences, as the repository config
files can define things like extensions that are required
for access to the repository.
Command-line Flags
Mercurial's default command-line parser is designed for humans,
and is not robust against malicious input. For instance, you can
start a debugger by passing --debugger as an option value:
$ REV=--debugger sh -c 'hg log -r "$REV"'
This happens because several command-line flags need to be
scanned without using a concrete command table, which may be
modified while loading repository settings and extensions.
Since Mercurial 4.4.2, the parsing of such flags may be
restricted by setting HGPLAIN=+strictflags. When this feature is
enabled, all early options (e.g. -R/--repository, --cwd,
--config) must be specified first amongst the other global
options, and cannot be injected to an arbitrary location:
$ HGPLAIN=+strictflags hg -R "$REPO" log -r "$REV"
In earlier Mercurial versions where +strictflags isn't available,
you can mitigate the issue by concatenating an option value with
its flag:
$ hg log -r"$REV" --keyword="$KEYWORD"
Consuming Command Output
It is common for machines to need to parse the output of
Mercurial commands for relevant data. This section describes the
various techniques for doing so.
Parsing Raw Command Output
Likely the simplest and most effective solution for consuming
command output is to simply invoke hg commands as you would as a
user and parse their output.
The output of many commands can easily be parsed with tools like
grep, sed, and awk.
A potential downside with parsing command output is that the
output of commands can change when Mercurial is upgraded. While
Mercurial does generally strive for strong backwards
compatibility, command output does occasionally change. Having
tests for your automated interactions with hg commands is
generally recommended, but is even more important when raw
command output parsing is involved.
Using Templates to Control Output
Many hg commands support templatized output via the -T/--template
argument. For more, see hg help templates.
Templates are useful for explicitly controlling output so that
you get exactly the data you want formatted how you want it. For
example, log -T {node}\n can be used to print a newline delimited
list of changeset nodes instead of a human-tailored output
containing authors, dates, descriptions, etc.
Tip If parsing raw command output is too complicated, consider
using templates to make your life easier.
The -T/--template argument allows specifying pre-defined styles.
Mercurial ships with the machine-readable styles cbor, json, and
xml, which provide CBOR, JSON, and XML output, respectively.
These are useful for producing output that is machine readable
as-is.
(Mercurial 5.0 is required for CBOR style.)
Important
The json and xml styles are considered experimental. While
they may be attractive to use for easily obtaining
machine-readable output, their behavior may change in
subsequent versions.
These styles may also exhibit unexpected results when
dealing with certain encodings. Mercurial treats things
like filenames as a series of bytes and normalizing
certain byte sequences to JSON or XML with certain
encoding settings can lead to surprises.
Command Server Output
If using the command server to interact with Mercurial, you are
likely using an existing library/API that abstracts
implementation details of the command server. If so, this
interface layer may perform parsing for you, saving you the work
of implementing it yourself.
Output Verbosity
Commands often have varying output verbosity, even when machine
readable styles are being used (e.g. -T json). Adding
-v/--verbose and --debug to the command's arguments can increase
the amount of data exposed by Mercurial.
An alternate way to get the data you need is by explicitly
specifying a template.
Other Topics
revsets
Revisions sets is a functional query language for
selecting a set of revisions. Think of it as SQL for
Mercurial repositories. Revsets are useful for querying
repositories for specific data.
See hg help revsets for more.
share extension
The share extension provides functionality for sharing
repository data across several working copies. It can even
automatically "pool" storage for logically related
repositories when cloning.
Configuring the share extension can lead to significant
resource utilization reduction, particularly around disk
space and the network. This is especially true for
continuous integration (CI) environments.
See hg help -e share for more.
Subrepositories let you nest external repositories or projects
into a parent Mercurial repository, and make commands operate on
them as a group.
Mercurial currently supports Mercurial, Git, and Subversion
subrepositories.
Subrepositories are made of three components:
1. Nested repository checkouts. They can appear anywhere in the
parent working directory.
2. Nested repository references. They are defined in .hgsub,
which should be placed in the root of working directory, and
tell where the subrepository checkouts come from. Mercurial
subrepositories are referenced like:
path/to/nested = https://example.com/nested/repo/path
Git and Subversion subrepos are also supported:
path/to/nested = [git]git://example.com/nested/repo/path
path/to/nested = [svn]https://example.com/nested/trunk/path
where path/to/nested is the checkout location relatively to
the parent Mercurial root, and
https://example.com/nested/repo/path is the source repository
path. The source can also reference a filesystem path.
Note that .hgsub does not exist by default in Mercurial
repositories, you have to create and add it to the parent
repository before using subrepositories.
3. Nested repository states. They are defined in .hgsubstate,
which is placed in the root of working directory, and capture
whatever information is required to restore the
subrepositories to the state they were committed in a parent
repository changeset. Mercurial automatically record the
nested repositories states when committing in the parent
repository.
Note
The .hgsubstate file should not be edited manually.
Adding a Subrepository
If .hgsub does not exist, create it and add it to the parent
repository. Clone or checkout the external projects where you
want it to live in the parent repository. Edit .hgsub and add the
subrepository entry as described above. At this point, the
subrepository is tracked and the next commit will record its
state in .hgsubstate and bind it to the committed changeset.
Synchronizing a Subrepository
Subrepos do not automatically track the latest changeset of their
sources. Instead, they are updated to the changeset that
corresponds with the changeset checked out in the top-level
changeset. This is so developers always get a consistent set of
compatible code and libraries when they update.
Thus, updating subrepos is a manual process. Simply check out
target subrepo at the desired revision, test in the top-level
repo, then commit in the parent repository to record the new
combination.
Deleting a Subrepository
To remove a subrepository from the parent repository, delete its
reference from .hgsub, then remove its files.
Interaction with Mercurial Commands
add add does not recurse in subrepos unless -S/--subrepos is
specified. However, if you specify the full path of a
file in a subrepo, it will be added even without
-S/--subrepos specified. Subversion subrepositories are
currently silently ignored.
addremove
addremove does not recurse into subrepos unless
-S/--subrepos is specified. However, if you specify the
full path of a directory in a subrepo, addremove will be
performed on it even without -S/--subrepos being
specified. Git and Subversion subrepositories will print
a warning and continue.
archive
archive does not recurse in subrepositories unless
-S/--subrepos is specified.
cat Git subrepositories only support exact file matches.
Subversion subrepositories are currently ignored.
commit commit creates a consistent snapshot of the state of the
entire project and its subrepositories. If any
subrepositories have been modified, Mercurial will abort.
Mercurial can be made to instead commit all modified
subrepositories by specifying -S/--subrepos, or setting
"ui.commitsubrepos=True" in a configuration file (see hg
help config). After there are no longer any modified
subrepositories, it records their state and finally
commits it in the parent repository. The --addremove
option also honors the -S/--subrepos option. However, Git
and Subversion subrepositories will print a warning and
abort.
diff diff does not recurse in subrepos unless -S/--subrepos is
specified. However, if you specify the full path of a
file or directory in a subrepo, it will be diffed even
without -S/--subrepos being specified. Subversion
subrepositories are currently silently ignored.
files files does not recurse into subrepos unless -S/--subrepos
is specified. However, if you specify the full path of a
file or directory in a subrepo, it will be displayed even
without -S/--subrepos being specified. Git and Subversion
subrepositories are currently silently ignored.
forget forget currently only handles exact file matches in
subrepos. Git and Subversion subrepositories are
currently silently ignored.
incoming
incoming does not recurse in subrepos unless -S/--subrepos
is specified. Git and Subversion subrepositories are
currently silently ignored.
outgoing
outgoing does not recurse in subrepos unless -S/--subrepos
is specified. Git and Subversion subrepositories are
currently silently ignored.
pull pull is not recursive since it is not clear what to pull
prior to running hg update. Listing and retrieving all
subrepositories changes referenced by the parent
repository pulled changesets is expensive at best,
impossible in the Subversion case.
push Mercurial will automatically push all subrepositories
first when the parent repository is being pushed. This
ensures new subrepository changes are available when
referenced by top-level repositories. Push is a no-op for
Subversion subrepositories.
serve serve does not recurse into subrepositories unless
-S/--subrepos is specified. Git and Subversion
subrepositories are currently silently ignored.
status status does not recurse into subrepositories unless
-S/--subrepos is specified. Subrepository changes are
displayed as regular Mercurial changes on the
subrepository elements. Subversion subrepositories are
currently silently ignored.
remove remove does not recurse into subrepositories unless
-S/--subrepos is specified. However, if you specify a
file or directory path in a subrepo, it will be removed
even without -S/--subrepos. Git and Subversion
subrepositories are currently silently ignored.
update update restores the subrepos in the state they were
originally committed in target changeset. If the recorded
changeset is not available in the current subrepository,
Mercurial will pull it in first before updating. This
means that updating can require network access when using
subrepositories.
Remapping Subrepositories Sources
A subrepository source location may change during a project life,
invalidating references stored in the parent repository history.
To fix this, rewriting rules can be defined in parent repository
hgrc file or in Mercurial configuration. See the [subpaths]
section in hgrc(5) for more details.
Mercurial allows you to customize output of commands through
templates. You can either pass in a template or select an
existing template-style from the command line, via the --template
option.
You can customize output for any "log-like" command: log,
outgoing, incoming, tip, parents, and heads.
Some built-in styles are packaged with Mercurial. These can be
listed with hg log --template list. Example usage:
$ hg log -r1.0::1.1 --template changelog
A template is a piece of text, with markup to invoke variable
expansion:
$ hg log -r1 --template "{node}\n"
b56ce7b07c52de7d5fd79fb89701ea538af65746
Keywords
Strings in curly braces are called keywords. The availability of
keywords depends on the exact context of the templater. These
keywords are usually available for templating a log-like command:
_fast_rank
the rank of a changeset if cached
The rank of a revision is the size of the sub-graph it
defines as a head. Equivalently, the rank of a revision r
is the size of the set ancestors(r), r included.
activebookmark
String. The active bookmark, if it is associated with the
changeset.
author Alias for {user}
bisect String. The changeset bisection status.
bookmarks
List of strings. Any bookmarks associated with the
changeset. Also sets 'active', the name of the active
bookmark.
branch String. The name of the branch on which the changeset was
committed.
changessincelatesttag
Integer. All ancestors not in the latest tag.
children
List of strings. The children of the changeset.
date Date information. The date when the changeset was
committed.
desc String. The text of the changeset description.
diffstat
String. Statistics of changes with the following format:
"modified files: +added/-removed lines"
extras List of dicts with key, value entries of the 'extras'
field of this changeset.
file_adds
List of strings. Files added by this changeset.
file_copies
List of strings. Files copied in this changeset with their
sources.
file_copies_switch
List of strings. Like "file_copies" but displayed only if
the --copied switch is set.
file_dels
List of strings. Files removed by this changeset.
file_mods
List of strings. Files modified by this changeset.
files List of strings. All files modified, added, or removed by
this changeset.
graphnode
String. The character representing the changeset node in
an ASCII revision graph.
graphwidth
Integer. The width of the graph drawn by 'log --graph' or
zero.
index Integer. The current iteration of the loop. (0 indexed)
latesttag
List of strings. The global tags on the most recent
globally tagged ancestor of this changeset. If no such
tags exist, the list consists of the single string "null".
latesttagdistance
Integer. Longest path to the latest tag.
namespaces
Dict of lists. Names attached to this changeset per
namespace.
negrev Integer. The repository-local changeset negative revision
number, which counts in the opposite direction.
node String. The changeset identification hash, as a 40
hexadecimal digit string.
onelinesummary
String. A one-line summary for the ctx (not including
trailing newline). The default template be overridden in
command-templates.oneline-summary.
p1 Changeset. The changeset's first parent. {p1.rev} for the
revision number, and {p1.node} for the identification
hash.
p2 Changeset. The changeset's second parent. {p2.rev} for the
revision number, and {p2.node} for the identification
hash.
parents
List of strings. The parents of the changeset in
"rev:node" format. If the changeset has only one "natural"
parent (the predecessor revision) nothing is shown.
peerurls
A dictionary of repository locations defined in the
[paths] section of your configuration file.
phase String. The changeset phase name.
reporoot
String. The root directory of the current repository.
rev Integer. The repository-local changeset revision number.
subrepos
List of strings. Updated subrepositories in the changeset.
tags List of strings. Any tags associated with the changeset.
termwidth
Integer. The width of the current terminal.
user String. The unmodified author of the changeset.
verbosity
String. The current output verbosity in 'debug', 'quiet',
'verbose', or ''.
The "date" keyword does not produce human-readable output. If you
want to use a date in your output, you can use a filter to
process it. Filters are functions which return a string based on
the input variable. Be sure to use the stringify filter first
when you're applying a string-input filter to a list-like input
variable. You can also use a chain of filters to get the desired
output:
$ hg tip --template "{date|isodate}\n"
2008-08-21 18:22 +0000
Filters
List of filters:
addbreaks
Any text. Add an XHTML "<br />" tag before the end of
every line except the last.
age Date. Returns a human-readable date/time difference
between the given date/time and the current date/time.
basename
Any text. Treats the text as a path, and returns the last
component of the path after splitting by the path
separator. For example, "foo/bar/baz" becomes "baz" and
"foo/bar//" becomes "".
cbor Any object. Serializes the object to CBOR bytes.
commondir
List of text. Treats each list item as file name with / as
path separator and returns the longest common directory
prefix shared by all list items. Returns the empty string
if no common prefix exists.
The list items are not normalized, i.e. "foo/../bar" is
handled as file "bar" in the directory "foo/..". Leading
slashes are ignored.
For example, ["foo/bar/baz", "foo/baz/bar"] becomes "foo"
and ["foo/bar", "baz"] becomes "".
count List or text. Returns the length as an integer.
dirname
Any text. Treats the text as a path, and strips the last
component of the path after splitting by the path
separator.
domain Any text. Finds the first string that looks like an email
address, and extracts just the domain component. Example:
User <user@example.com> becomes example.com.
email Any text. Extracts the first string that looks like an
email address. Example: User <user@example.com> becomes
user@example.com.
emailuser
Any text. Returns the user portion of an email address.
escape Any text. Replaces the special XML/XHTML characters "&",
"<" and ">" with XML entities, and filters out NUL
characters.
fill68 Any text. Wraps the text to fit in 68 columns.
fill76 Any text. Wraps the text to fit in 76 columns.
firstline
Any text. Returns the first line of text.
hex Any text. Convert a binary Mercurial node identifier into
its long hexadecimal representation.
hgdate Date. Returns the date as a pair of numbers: "1157407993
25200" (Unix timestamp, timezone offset).
isodate
Date. Returns the date in ISO 8601 format: "2009-08-18
13:00 +0200".
isodatesec
Date. Returns the date in ISO 8601 format, including
seconds: "2009-08-18 13:00:13 +0200". See also the
rfc3339date filter.
json Any object. Serializes the object to a JSON formatted
text.
lower Any text. Converts the text to lowercase.
nonempty
Any text. Returns '(none)' if the string is empty.
obfuscate
Any text. Returns the input text rendered as a sequence of
XML entities.
person Any text. Returns the name before an email address,
interpreting it as per RFC 5322.
revescape
Any text. Escapes all "special" characters, except @.
Forward slashes are escaped twice to prevent web servers
from prematurely unescaping them. For example, "@foo
bar/baz" becomes "@foo%20bar%252Fbaz".
rfc3339date
Date. Returns a date using the Internet date format
specified in RFC 3339: "2009-08-18T13:00:13+02:00".
rfc822date
Date. Returns a date using the same format used in email
headers: "Tue, 18 Aug 2009 13:00:13 +0200".
short Changeset hash. Returns the short form of a changeset
hash, i.e. a 12 hexadecimal digit string.
shortbisect
Any text. Treats label as a bisection status, and returns
a single-character representing the status (G: good, B:
bad, S: skipped, U: untested, I: ignored). Returns single
space if text is not a valid bisection status.
shortdate
Date. Returns a date like "2006-09-18".
slashpath
Any text. Replaces the native path separator with slash.
splitlines
Any text. Split text into a list of lines.
stringify
Any type. Turns the value into text by converting values
into text and concatenating them.
stripdir
Treat the text as path and strip a directory level, if
possible. For example, "foo" and "foo/bar" becomes "foo".
tabindent
Any text. Returns the text, with every non-empty line
except the first starting with a tab character.
upper Any text. Converts the text to uppercase.
urlescape
Any text. Escapes all "special" characters. For example,
"foo bar" becomes "foo%20bar".
user Any text. Returns a short representation of a user name or
email address.
utf8 Any text. Converts from the local character encoding to
UTF-8.
Note that a filter is nothing more than a function call, i.e.
expr|filter is equivalent to filter(expr).
Functions
In addition to filters, there are some basic built-in functions:
config(section, name[, default])
Returns the requested hgrc config option as a string.
configbool(section, name[, default])
Returns the requested hgrc config option as a boolean.
configint(section, name[, default])
Returns the requested hgrc config option as an integer.
date(date[, fmt])
Format a date. See hg help dates for formatting strings.
The default is a Unix date format, including the timezone:
"Mon Sep 04 15:13:13 2006 0700".
dict([[key=]value...])
Construct a dict from key-value pairs. A key may be
omitted if a value expression can provide an unambiguous
name.
diff([includepattern [, excludepattern]])
Show a diff, optionally specifying files to include or
exclude.
files(pattern)
All files of the current changeset matching the pattern.
See hg help patterns.
fill(text[, width[, initialident[, hangindent]]])
Fill many paragraphs with optional indentation. See the
"fill" filter.
filter(iterable[, expr])
Remove empty elements from a list or a dict. If expr
specified, it's applied to each element to test emptiness.
get(dict, key)
Get an attribute/key from an object. Some keywords are
complex types. This function allows you to obtain the
value of an attribute on these types.
if(expr, then[, else])
Conditionally execute based on the result of an
expression.
ifcontains(needle, haystack, then[, else])
Conditionally execute based on whether the item "needle"
is in "haystack".
ifeq(expr1, expr2, then[, else])
Conditionally execute based on whether 2 items are
equivalent.
indent(text, indentchars[, firstline])
Indents all non-empty lines with the characters given in
the indentchars string. An optional third parameter will
override the indent for the first line only if present.
join(list, sep)
Join items in a list with a delimiter.
label(label, expr)
Apply a label to generated content. Content with a label
applied can result in additional post-processing, such as
automatic colorization.
latesttag([pattern])
The global tags matching the given pattern on the most
recent globally tagged ancestor of this changeset. If no
such tags exist, the "{tag}" template resolves to the
string "null". See hg help revisions.patterns for the
pattern syntax.
localdate(date[, tz])
Converts a date to the specified timezone. The default is
local date.
mailmap(author)
Return the author, updated according to the value set in
the .mailmap file
max(iterable)
Return the max of an iterable
min(iterable)
Return the min of an iterable
mod(a, b)
Calculate a mod b such that a / b + a mod b == a
pad(text, width[, fillchar=' '[, left=False[, truncate=False]]])
Pad text with a fill character.
relpath(path)
Convert a repository-absolute path into a filesystem path
relative to the current working directory.
revset(query[, formatargs...])
Execute a revision set query. See hg help revset.
rstdoc(text, style)
Format reStructuredText.
search(pattern, text)
Look for the first text matching the regular expression
pattern. Groups are accessible as {1}, {2}, ... in
%-mapped template.
separate(sep, args...)
Add a separator between non-empty arguments.
shortest(node, minlength=4)
Obtain the shortest representation of a node.
startswith(pattern, text)
Returns the value from the "text" argument if it begins
with the content from the "pattern" argument.
strip(text[, chars])
Strip characters from a string. By default, strips all
leading and trailing whitespace.
sub(pattern, replacement, expression)
Perform text substitution using regular expressions.
subsetparents(rev, revset)
Look up parents of the rev in the sub graph given by the
revset.
word(number, text[, separator])
Return the nth word from a string.
Operators
We provide a limited set of infix arithmetic operations on
integers:
+ for addition
- for subtraction
* for multiplication
/ for floor division (division rounded to integer nearest -infinity)
Division fulfills the law x = x / y + mod(x, y).
Also, for any expression that returns a list, there is a list
operator:
expr % "{template}"
As seen in the above example, {template} is interpreted as a
template. To prevent it from being interpreted, you can use an
escape character \{ or a raw string prefix, r'...'.
The dot operator can be used as a shorthand for accessing a sub
item:
• expr.member is roughly equivalent to expr % '{member}' if expr
returns a non-list/dict. The returned value is not stringified.
• dict.key is identical to get(dict, 'key').
Aliases
New keywords and functions can be defined in the templatealias
section of a Mercurial configuration file:
<alias> = <definition>
Arguments of the form a1, a2, etc. are substituted from the alias
into the definition.
For example,
[templatealias]
r = rev
rn = "{r}:{node|short}"
leftpad(s, w) = pad(s, w, ' ', True)
defines two symbol aliases, r and rn, and a function alias
leftpad().
It's also possible to specify complete template strings, using
the templates section. The syntax used is the general template
string syntax.
For example,
[templates]
nodedate = "{node|short}: {date(date, "%Y-%m-%d")}\n"
defines a template, nodedate, which can be called like:
$ hg log -r . -Tnodedate
A template defined in templates section can also be referenced
from another template:
$ hg log -r . -T "{rev} {nodedate}"
but be aware that the keywords cannot be overridden by templates.
For example, a template defined as templates.rev cannot be
referenced as {rev}.
A template defined in templates section may have sub templates
which are inserted before/after/between items:
[templates]
myjson = ' {dict(rev, node|short)|json}'
myjson:docheader = '\{\n'
myjson:docfooter = '\n}\n'
myjson:separator = ',\n'
Examples
Some sample command line templates:
• Format lists, e.g. files:
$ hg log -r 0 --template "files:\n{files % ' {file}\n'}"
• Join the list of files with a ", ":
$ hg log -r 0 --template "files: {join(files, ', ')}\n"
• Join the list of files ending with ".py" with a ", ":
$ hg log -r 0 --template "pythonfiles: {join(files('**.py'), ', ')}\n"
• Separate non-empty arguments by a " ":
$ hg log -r 0 --template "{separate(' ', node, bookmarks, tags}\n"
• Modify each line of a commit description:
$ hg log --template "{splitlines(desc) % '**** {line}\n'}"
• Format date:
$ hg log -r 0 --template "{date(date, '%Y')}\n"
• Display date in UTC:
$ hg log -r 0 --template "{localdate(date, 'UTC')|date}\n"
• Output the description set to a fill-width of 30:
$ hg log -r 0 --template "{fill(desc, 30)}"
• Use a conditional to test for the default branch:
$ hg log -r 0 --template "{ifeq(branch, 'default', 'on the main branch',
'on branch {branch}')}\n"
• Append a newline if not empty:
$ hg tip --template "{if(author, '{author}\n')}"
• Label the output for use with the color extension:
$ hg log -r 0 --template "{label('changeset.{phase}', node|short)}\n"
• Invert the firstline filter, i.e. everything but the first
line:
$ hg log -r 0 --template "{sub(r'^.*\n?\n?', '', desc)}\n"
• Display the contents of the 'extra' field, one per line:
$ hg log -r 0 --template "{join(extras, '\n')}\n"
• Mark the active bookmark with '*':
$ hg log --template "{bookmarks % '{bookmark}{ifeq(bookmark, active, '*')} '}\n"
• Find the previous release candidate tag, the distance and
changes since the tag:
$ hg log -r . --template "{latesttag('re:^.*-rc$') % '{tag}, {changes}, {distance}'}\n"
• Mark the working copy parent with '@':
$ hg log --template "{ifcontains(rev, revset('.'), '@')}\n"
• Show details of parent revisions:
$ hg log --template "{revset('parents(%d)', rev) % '{desc|firstline}\n'}"
• Show only commit descriptions that start with "template":
$ hg log --template "{startswith('template', firstline(desc))}\n"
• Print the first word of each line of a commit message:
$ hg log --template "{word(0, desc)}\n"
Valid URLs are of the form:
local/filesystem/path[#revision]
file://local/filesystem/path[#revision]
http://[user[:pass]@]host[:port]/[path][#revision]
https://[user[:pass]@]host[:port]/[path][#revision]
ssh://[user@]host[:port]/[path][#revision]
path://pathname
Paths in the local filesystem can either point to Mercurial
repositories or to bundle files (as created by hg bundle or hg
incoming --bundle). See also hg help paths.
An optional identifier after # indicates a particular branch,
tag, or changeset to use from the remote repository. See also hg
help revisions.
Some features, such as pushing to http:// and https:// URLs are
only possible if the feature is explicitly enabled on the remote
Mercurial server.
Note that the security of HTTPS URLs depends on proper
configuration of web.cacerts.
Some notes about using SSH with Mercurial:
• SSH requires an accessible shell account on the destination
machine and a copy of hg in the remote path or specified with
remotecmd.
• path is relative to the remote user's home directory by
default. Use an extra slash at the start of a path to specify
an absolute path:
ssh://example.com//tmp/repository
• Mercurial doesn't use its own compression via SSH; the right
thing to do is to configure it in your ~/.ssh/config, e.g.:
Host *.mylocalnetwork.example.com
Compression no
Host *
Compression yes
Alternatively specify "ssh -C" as your ssh command in your
configuration file or with the --ssh command line option.
These URLs can all be stored in your configuration file with path
aliases under the [paths] section like so:
[paths]
alias1 = URL1
alias2 = URL2
...
You can then use the alias for any command that uses a URL (for
example hg pull alias1 will be treated as hg pull URL1).
Two path aliases are special because they are used as defaults
when you do not provide the URL to a command:
default:
When you create a repository with hg clone, the clone
command saves the location of the source repository as the
new repository's 'default' path. This is then used when
you omit path from push- and pull-like commands (including
incoming and outgoing).
default-push:
The push command will look for a path named
'default-push', and prefer it over 'default' if both are
defined.
These alias can also be use in the path:// scheme:
[paths]
alias1 = URL1
alias2 = path://alias1
...
check hg help config.paths for details about the behavior of such
"sub-path".
This section contains help for extensions that are distributed
together with Mercurial. Help for other extensions is available
in the help system.
absorb
apply working directory changes to changesets (EXPERIMENTAL)
The absorb extension provides a command to use annotate
information to amend modified chunks into the corresponding
non-public changesets.
[absorb]
# only check 50 recent non-public changesets at most
max-stack-size = 50
# whether to add noise to new commits to avoid obsolescence cycle
add-noise = 1
# make `amend --correlated` a shortcut to the main command
amend-flag = correlated
[color]
absorb.description = yellow
absorb.node = blue bold
absorb.path = bold
Commands
Change creation
absorb
incorporate corrections into the stack of draft changesets:
hg absorb [OPTION] [FILE]...
absorb analyzes each change in your working directory and
attempts to amend the changed lines into the changesets in your
stack that first introduced those lines.
If absorb cannot find an unambiguous changeset to amend for a
change, that change will be left in the working directory,
untouched. They can be observed by hg status or hg diff
afterwards. In other words, absorb does not write to the working
directory.
Changesets outside the revset ::. and not public() and not
merge() will not be changed.
Changesets that become empty after applying the changes will be
deleted.
By default, absorb will show what it plans to do and prompt for
confirmation. If you are confident that the changes will be
absorbed to the correct place, run hg absorb -a to apply the
changes immediately.
Returns 0 on success, 1 if all chunks were ignored and nothing
amended.
Options:
-a, --apply-changes
apply changes without prompting for confirmation
-p, --print-changes
always print which changesets are modified by which
changes
-i, --interactive
interactively select which chunks to apply
-e, --edit-lines
edit what lines belong to which changesets before commit
(EXPERIMENTAL)
-n, --dry-run
do not perform actions, just print output
--style <STYLE>
display using template map file (DEPRECATED)
-T,--template <TEMPLATE>
display with template
-I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
include names matching the given patterns
-X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
exclude names matching the given patterns
[+] marked option can be specified multiple times
acl
hooks for controlling repository access
This hook makes it possible to allow or deny write access to
given branches and paths of a repository when receiving incoming
changesets via pretxnchangegroup and pretxncommit.
The authorization is matched based on the local user name on the
system where the hook runs, and not the committer of the original
changeset (since the latter is merely informative).
The acl hook is best used along with a restricted shell like
hgsh, preventing authenticating users from doing anything other
than pushing or pulling. The hook is not safe to use if users
have interactive shell access, as they can then disable the hook.
Nor is it safe if remote users share an account, because then
there is no way to distinguish them.
The order in which access checks are performed is:
1. Deny list for branches (section acl.deny.branches)
2. Allow list for branches (section acl.allow.branches)
3. Deny list for paths (section acl.deny)
4. Allow list for paths (section acl.allow)
The allow and deny sections take key-value pairs.
Branch-based Access Control
Use the acl.deny.branches and acl.allow.branches sections to have
branch-based access control. Keys in these sections can be
either:
• a branch name, or
• an asterisk, to match any branch;
The corresponding values can be either:
• a comma-separated list containing users and groups, or
• an asterisk, to match anyone;
You can add the "!" prefix to a user or group name to invert the
sense of the match.
Path-based Access Control
Use the acl.deny and acl.allow sections to have path-based access
control. Keys in these sections accept a subtree pattern (with a
glob syntax by default). The corresponding values follow the same
syntax as the other sections above.
Bookmark-based Access Control
Use the acl.deny.bookmarks and acl.allow.bookmarks sections to
have bookmark-based access control. Keys in these sections can be
either:
• a bookmark name, or
• an asterisk, to match any bookmark;
The corresponding values can be either:
• a comma-separated list containing users and groups, or
• an asterisk, to match anyone;
You can add the "!" prefix to a user or group name to invert the
sense of the match.
Note: for interactions between clients and servers using
Mercurial 3.6+ a rejection will generally reject the entire push,
for interactions involving older clients, the commit transactions
will already be accepted, and only the bookmark movement will be
rejected.
Groups
Group names must be prefixed with an @ symbol. Specifying a group
name has the same effect as specifying all the users in that
group.
You can define group members in the acl.groups section. If a
group name is not defined there, and Mercurial is running under a
Unix-like system, the list of users will be taken from the OS.
Otherwise, an exception will be raised.
Example Configuration
[hooks]
# Use this if you want to check access restrictions at commit time
pretxncommit.acl = python:hgext.acl.hook
# Use this if you want to check access restrictions for pull, push,
# bundle and serve.
pretxnchangegroup.acl = python:hgext.acl.hook
[acl]
# Allow or deny access for incoming changes only if their source is
# listed here, let them pass otherwise. Source is "serve" for all
# remote access (http or ssh), "push", "pull" or "bundle" when the
# related commands are run locally.
# Default: serve
sources = serve
[acl.deny.branches]
# Everyone is denied to the frozen branch:
frozen-branch = *
# A bad user is denied on all branches:
* = bad-user
[acl.allow.branches]
# A few users are allowed on branch-a:
branch-a = user-1, user-2, user-3
# Only one user is allowed on branch-b:
branch-b = user-1
# The super user is allowed on any branch:
* = super-user
# Everyone is allowed on branch-for-tests:
branch-for-tests = *
[acl.deny]
# This list is checked first. If a match is found, acl.allow is not
# checked. All users are granted access if acl.deny is not present.
# Format for both lists: glob pattern = user, ..., @group, ...
# To match everyone, use an asterisk for the user:
# my/glob/pattern = *
# user6 will not have write access to any file:
** = user6
# Group "hg-denied" will not have write access to any file:
** = @hg-denied
# Nobody will be able to change "DONT-TOUCH-THIS.txt", despite
# everyone being able to change all other files. See below.
src/main/resources/DONT-TOUCH-THIS.txt = *
[acl.allow]
# if acl.allow is not present, all users are allowed by default
# empty acl.allow = no users allowed
# User "doc_writer" has write access to any file under the "docs"
# folder:
docs/** = doc_writer
# User "jack" and group "designers" have write access to any file
# under the "images" folder:
images/** = jack, @designers
# Everyone (except for "user6" and "@hg-denied" - see acl.deny above)
# will have write access to any file under the "resources" folder
# (except for 1 file. See acl.deny):
src/main/resources/** = *
.hgtags = release_engineer
Examples using the ! prefix
Suppose there's a branch that only a given user (or group) should
be able to push to, and you don't want to restrict access to any
other branch that may be created.
The "!" prefix allows you to prevent anyone except a given user
or group to push changesets in a given branch or path.
In the examples below, we will: 1) Deny access to branch "ring"
to anyone but user "gollum" 2) Deny access to branch "lake" to
anyone but members of the group "hobbit" 3) Deny access to a file
to anyone but user "gollum"
[acl.allow.branches]
# Empty
[acl.deny.branches]
# 1) only 'gollum' can commit to branch 'ring';
# 'gollum' and anyone else can still commit to any other branch.
ring = !gollum
# 2) only members of the group 'hobbit' can commit to branch 'lake';
# 'hobbit' members and anyone else can still commit to any other branch.
lake = !@hobbit
# You can also deny access based on file paths:
[acl.allow]
# Empty
[acl.deny]
# 3) only 'gollum' can change the file below;
# 'gollum' and anyone else can still change any other file.
/misty/mountains/cave/ring = !gollum
amend
provide the amend command (EXPERIMENTAL)
This extension provides an amend command that is similar to
commit --amend but does not prompt an editor.
Commands
Change creation
amend
amend the working copy parent with all or specified outstanding
changes:
hg amend [OPTION]... [FILE]...
Similar to hg commit --amend, but reuse the commit message
without invoking editor, unless --edit was set.
See hg help commit for more details.
Options:
-A, --addremove
mark new/missing files as added/removed before committing
-e, --edit
invoke editor on commit messages
-i, --interactive
use interactive mode
--close-branch
mark a branch as closed, hiding it from the branch list
-s, --secret
use the secret phase for committing
-n,--note <VALUE>
store a note on the amend
-I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
include names matching the given patterns
-X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
exclude names matching the given patterns
-m,--message <TEXT>
use text as commit message
-l,--logfile <FILE>
read commit message from file
-d,--date <DATE>
record the specified date as commit date
-u,--user <USER>
record the specified user as committer
-D, --currentdate
record the current date as commit date
-U, --currentuser
record the current user as committer
[+] marked option can be specified multiple times
automv
check for unrecorded moves at commit time (EXPERIMENTAL)
This extension checks at commit/amend time if any of the
committed files comes from an unrecorded mv.
The threshold at which a file is considered a move can be set
with the automv.similarity config option. This option takes a
percentage between 0 (disabled) and 100 (files must be
identical), the default is 95.
beautifygraph
beautify log -G output by using Unicode characters (EXPERIMENTAL)
A terminal with UTF-8 support and monospace narrow text are
required.
blackbox
log repository events to a blackbox for debugging
Logs event information to .hg/blackbox.log to help debug and
diagnose problems. The events that get logged can be configured
via the blackbox.track and blackbox.ignore config keys.
Examples:
[blackbox]
track = *
ignore = pythonhook
# dirty is *EXPENSIVE* (slow);
# each log entry indicates `+` if the repository is dirty, like :hg:`id`.
dirty = True
# record the source of log messages
logsource = True
[blackbox]
track = command, commandfinish, commandexception, exthook, pythonhook
[blackbox]
track = incoming
[blackbox]
# limit the size of a log file
maxsize = 1.5 MB
# rotate up to N log files when the current one gets too big
maxfiles = 3
[blackbox]
# Include microseconds in log entries with %f (see Python function
# datetime.datetime.strftime)
date-format = %Y-%m-%d @ %H:%M:%S.%f
Commands
Repository maintenance
blackbox
view the recent repository events:
hg blackbox [OPTION]...
view the recent repository events
Options:
-l,--limit <VALUE>
the number of events to show (default: 10)
bookflow
implements bookmark-based branching (EXPERIMENTAL)
• Disables creation of new branches (config:
enable_branches=False).
• Requires an active bookmark on commit (config:
require_bookmark=True).
• Doesn't move the active bookmark on update, only on commit.
• Requires '--rev' for moving an existing bookmark.
• Protects special bookmarks (config: protect=@).
flow related commands
hg book NAME
create a new bookmark
hg book NAME -r REV
move bookmark to revision (fast-forward)
hg up|co NAME
switch to bookmark
hg push -B .
push active bookmark
bugzilla
hooks for integrating with the Bugzilla bug tracker
This hook extension adds comments on bugs in Bugzilla when
changesets that refer to bugs by Bugzilla ID are seen. The
comment is formatted using the Mercurial template mechanism.
The bug references can optionally include an update for Bugzilla
of the hours spent working on the bug. Bugs can also be marked
fixed.
Four basic modes of access to Bugzilla are provided:
1. Access via the Bugzilla REST-API. Requires bugzilla 5.0 or
later.
2. Access via the Bugzilla XMLRPC interface. Requires Bugzilla
3.4 or later.
3. Check data via the Bugzilla XMLRPC interface and submit bug
change via email to Bugzilla email interface. Requires
Bugzilla 3.4 or later.
4. Writing directly to the Bugzilla database. Only Bugzilla
installations using MySQL are supported. Requires Python
MySQLdb.
Writing directly to the database is susceptible to schema
changes, and relies on a Bugzilla contrib script to send out bug
change notification emails. This script runs as the user running
Mercurial, must be run on the host with the Bugzilla install, and
requires permission to read Bugzilla configuration details and
the necessary MySQL user and password to have full access rights
to the Bugzilla database. For these reasons this access mode is
now considered deprecated, and will not be updated for new
Bugzilla versions going forward. Only adding comments is
supported in this access mode.
Access via XMLRPC needs a Bugzilla username and password to be
specified in the configuration. Comments are added under that
username. Since the configuration must be readable by all
Mercurial users, it is recommended that the rights of that user
are restricted in Bugzilla to the minimum necessary to add
comments. Marking bugs fixed requires Bugzilla 4.0 and later.
Access via XMLRPC/email uses XMLRPC to query Bugzilla, but sends
email to the Bugzilla email interface to submit comments to bugs.
The From: address in the email is set to the email address of the
Mercurial user, so the comment appears to come from the Mercurial
user. In the event that the Mercurial user email is not
recognized by Bugzilla as a Bugzilla user, the email associated
with the Bugzilla username used to log into Bugzilla is used
instead as the source of the comment. Marking bugs fixed works on
all supported Bugzilla versions.
Access via the REST-API needs either a Bugzilla username and
password or an apikey specified in the configuration. Comments
are made under the given username or the user associated with the
apikey in Bugzilla.
Configuration items common to all access modes:
bugzilla.version
The access type to use. Values recognized are:
restapi
Bugzilla REST-API, Bugzilla 5.0 and later.
xmlrpc
Bugzilla XMLRPC interface.
xmlrpc+email
Bugzilla XMLRPC and email interfaces.
3.0
MySQL access, Bugzilla 3.0 and later.
2.18
MySQL access, Bugzilla 2.18 and up to but not
including 3.0.
2.16
MySQL access, Bugzilla 2.16 and up to but not
including 2.18.
bugzilla.regexp
Regular expression to match bug IDs for update in
changeset commit message. It must contain one "()" named
group <ids> containing the bug IDs separated by non-digit
characters. It may also contain a named group <hours> with
a floating-point number giving the hours worked on the
bug. If no named groups are present, the first "()" group
is assumed to contain the bug IDs, and work time is not
updated. The default expression matches Bug 1234, Bug no.
1234, Bug number 1234, Bugs 1234,5678, Bug 1234 and 5678
and variations thereof, followed by an hours number
prefixed by h or hours, e.g. hours 1.5. Matching is case
insensitive.
bugzilla.fixregexp
Regular expression to match bug IDs for marking fixed in
changeset commit message. This must contain a "()" named
group <ids>` containing the bug IDs separated by non-digit
characters. It may also contain a named group ``<hours>
with a floating-point number giving the hours worked on
the bug. If no named groups are present, the first "()"
group is assumed to contain the bug IDs, and work time is
not updated. The default expression matches Fixes 1234,
Fixes bug 1234, Fixes bugs 1234,5678, Fixes 1234 and 5678
and variations thereof, followed by an hours number
prefixed by h or hours, e.g. hours 1.5. Matching is case
insensitive.
bugzilla.fixstatus
The status to set a bug to when marking fixed. Default
RESOLVED.
bugzilla.fixresolution
The resolution to set a bug to when marking fixed. Default
FIXED.
bugzilla.style
The style file to use when formatting comments.
bugzilla.template
Template to use when formatting comments. Overrides style
if specified. In addition to the usual Mercurial keywords,
the extension specifies:
{bug}
The Bugzilla bug ID.
{root}
The full pathname of the Mercurial repository.
{webroot}
Stripped pathname of the Mercurial repository.
{hgweb}
Base URL for browsing Mercurial repositories.
Default changeset {node|short} in repo {root} refers to
bug {bug}.\ndetails:\n\t{desc|tabindent}
bugzilla.strip
The number of path separator characters to strip from the
front of the Mercurial repository path ({root} in
templates) to produce {webroot}. For example, a repository
with {root} /var/local/my-project with a strip of 2 gives
a value for {webroot} of my-project. Default 0.
web.baseurl
Base URL for browsing Mercurial repositories. Referenced
from templates as {hgweb}.
Configuration items common to XMLRPC+email and MySQL access
modes:
bugzilla.usermap
Path of file containing Mercurial committer email to
Bugzilla user email mappings. If specified, the file
should contain one mapping per line:
committer = Bugzilla user
See also the [usermap] section.
The [usermap] section is used to specify mappings of Mercurial
committer email to Bugzilla user email. See also
bugzilla.usermap. Contains entries of the form committer =
Bugzilla user.
XMLRPC and REST-API access mode configuration:
bugzilla.bzurl
The base URL for the Bugzilla installation. Default
http://localhost/bugzilla .
bugzilla.user
The username to use to log into Bugzilla via XMLRPC.
Default bugs.
bugzilla.password
The password for Bugzilla login.
REST-API access mode uses the options listed above as well as:
bugzilla.apikey
An apikey generated on the Bugzilla instance for api
access. Using an apikey removes the need to store the
user and password options.
XMLRPC+email access mode uses the XMLRPC access mode
configuration items, and also:
bugzilla.bzemail
The Bugzilla email address.
In addition, the Mercurial email settings must be configured. See
the documentation in hgrc(5), sections [email] and [smtp].
MySQL access mode configuration:
bugzilla.host
Hostname of the MySQL server holding the Bugzilla
database. Default localhost.
bugzilla.db
Name of the Bugzilla database in MySQL. Default bugs.
bugzilla.user
Username to use to access MySQL server. Default bugs.
bugzilla.password
Password to use to access MySQL server.
bugzilla.timeout
Database connection timeout (seconds). Default 5.
bugzilla.bzuser
Fallback Bugzilla user name to record comments with, if
changeset committer cannot be found as a Bugzilla user.
bugzilla.bzdir
Bugzilla install directory. Used by default notify.
Default /var/www/html/bugzilla.
bugzilla.notify
The command to run to get Bugzilla to send bug change
notification emails. Substitutes from a map with 3 keys,
bzdir, id (bug id) and user (committer bugzilla email).
Default depends on version; from 2.18 it is "cd %(bzdir)s
&& perl -T contrib/sendbugmail.pl %(id)s %(user)s".
Activating the extension:
[extensions]
bugzilla =
[hooks]
# run bugzilla hook on every change pulled or pushed in here
incoming.bugzilla = python:hgext.bugzilla.hook
Example configurations:
XMLRPC example configuration. This uses the Bugzilla at
http://my-project.org/bugzilla , logging in as user
bugmail@my-project.org with password plugh. It is used with a
collection of Mercurial repositories in /var/local/hg/repos/,
with a web interface at http://my-project.org/hg .
[bugzilla]
bzurl=http://my-project.org/bugzilla
user=bugmail@my-project.org
password=plugh
version=xmlrpc
template=Changeset {node|short} in {root|basename}.
{hgweb}/{webroot}/rev/{node|short}\n
{desc}\n
strip=5
[web]
baseurl=http://my-project.org/hg
XMLRPC+email example configuration. This uses the Bugzilla at
http://my-project.org/bugzilla , logging in as user
bugmail@my-project.org with password plugh. It is used with a
collection of Mercurial repositories in /var/local/hg/repos/,
with a web interface at http://my-project.org/hg . Bug comments
are sent to the Bugzilla email address bugzilla@my-project.org.
[bugzilla]
bzurl=http://my-project.org/bugzilla
user=bugmail@my-project.org
password=plugh
version=xmlrpc+email
bzemail=bugzilla@my-project.org
template=Changeset {node|short} in {root|basename}.
{hgweb}/{webroot}/rev/{node|short}\n
{desc}\n
strip=5
[web]
baseurl=http://my-project.org/hg
[usermap]
user@emaildomain.com=user.name@bugzilladomain.com
MySQL example configuration. This has a local Bugzilla 3.2
installation in /opt/bugzilla-3.2. The MySQL database is on
localhost, the Bugzilla database name is bugs and MySQL is
accessed with MySQL username bugs password XYZZY. It is used with
a collection of Mercurial repositories in /var/local/hg/repos/,
with a web interface at http://my-project.org/hg .
[bugzilla]
host=localhost
password=XYZZY
version=3.0
bzuser=unknown@domain.com
bzdir=/opt/bugzilla-3.2
template=Changeset {node|short} in {root|basename}.
{hgweb}/{webroot}/rev/{node|short}\n
{desc}\n
strip=5
[web]
baseurl=http://my-project.org/hg
[usermap]
user@emaildomain.com=user.name@bugzilladomain.com
All the above add a comment to the Bugzilla bug record of the
form:
Changeset 3b16791d6642 in repository-name.
http://my-project.org/hg/repository-name/rev/3b16791d6642
Changeset commit comment. Bug 1234.
censor
erase file content at a given revision
The censor command instructs Mercurial to erase all content of a
file at a given revision without updating the changeset hash.
This allows existing history to remain valid while preventing
future clones/pulls from receiving the erased data.
Typical uses for censor are due to security or legal
requirements, including:
* Passwords, private keys, cryptographic material
* Licensed data/code/libraries for which the license has expired
* Personally Identifiable Information or other private data
Censored nodes can interrupt mercurial's typical operation
whenever the excised data needs to be materialized. Some
commands, like hg cat/hg revert, simply fail when asked to
produce censored data. Others, like hg verify and hg update, must
be capable of tolerating censored data to continue to function in
a meaningful way. Such commands only tolerate censored file
revisions if they are allowed by the "censor.policy=ignore"
config option.
A few informative commands such as hg grep will unconditionally
ignore censored data and merely report that it was encountered.
Commands
Repository maintenance
censor
hg censor -r REV [-t TEXT] [FILE]
Options:
-r,--rev <REV>
censor file from specified revision
-t,--tombstone <TEXT>
replacement tombstone data
children
command to display child changesets (DEPRECATED)
This extension is deprecated. You should use hg log -r
"children(REV)" instead.
Commands
Change navigation
children
show the children of the given or working directory revision:
hg children [-r REV] [FILE]
Print the children of the working directory's revisions. If a
revision is given via -r/--rev, the children of that revision
will be printed. If a file argument is given, revision in which
the file was last changed (after the working directory revision
or the argument to --rev if given) is printed.
Please use hg log instead:
hg children => hg log -r "children(.)"
hg children -r REV => hg log -r "children(REV)"
See hg help log and hg help revsets.children.
Options:
-r,--rev <REV>
show children of the specified revision (default: .)
--style <STYLE>
display using template map file (DEPRECATED)
-T,--template <TEMPLATE>
display with template
churn
command to display statistics about repository history
Commands
Repository maintenance
churn
histogram of changes to the repository:
hg churn [-d DATE] [-r REV] [--aliases FILE] [FILE]
This command will display a histogram representing the number of
changed lines or revisions, grouped according to the given
template. The default template will group changes by author. The
--dateformat option may be used to group the results by date
instead.
Statistics are based on the number of changed lines, or
alternatively the number of matching revisions if the
--changesets option is specified.
Examples:
# display count of changed lines for every committer
hg churn -T "{author|email}"
# display daily activity graph
hg churn -f "%H" -s -c
# display activity of developers by month
hg churn -f "%Y-%m" -s -c
# display count of lines changed in every year
hg churn -f "%Y" -s
# display count of lines changed in a time range
hg churn -d "2020-04 to 2020-09"
It is possible to map alternate email addresses to a main address
by providing a file using the following format:
<alias email> = <actual email>
Such a file may be specified with the --aliases option, otherwise
a .hgchurn file will be looked for in the working directory root.
Aliases will be split from the rightmost "=".
Options:
-r,--rev <REV[+]>
count rate for the specified revision or revset
-d,--date <DATE>
count rate for revisions matching date spec
-t,--oldtemplate <TEMPLATE>
template to group changesets (DEPRECATED)
-T,--template <TEMPLATE>
template to group changesets (default: {author|email})
-f,--dateformat <FORMAT>
strftime-compatible format for grouping by date
-c, --changesets
count rate by number of changesets
-s, --sort
sort by key (default: sort by count)
--diffstat
display added/removed lines separately
--aliases <FILE>
file with email aliases
-I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
include names matching the given patterns
-X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
exclude names matching the given patterns
[+] marked option can be specified multiple times
clonebundles
advertise pre-generated bundles to seed clones
"clonebundles" is a server-side extension used to advertise the
existence of pre-generated, externally hosted bundle files to
clients that are cloning so that cloning can be faster, more
reliable, and require less resources on the server. "pullbundles"
is a related feature for sending pre-generated bundle files to
clients as part of pull operations.
Cloning can be a CPU and I/O intensive operation on servers.
Traditionally, the server, in response to a client's request to
clone, dynamically generates a bundle containing the entire
repository content and sends it to the client. There is no
caching on the server and the server will have to redundantly
generate the same outgoing bundle in response to each clone
request. For servers with large repositories or with high clone
volume, the load from clones can make scaling the server
challenging and costly.
This extension provides server operators the ability to offload
potentially expensive clone load to an external service.
Pre-generated bundles also allow using more CPU intensive
compression, reducing the effective bandwidth requirements.
Here's how clone bundles work:
1. A server operator establishes a mechanism for making bundle
files available on a hosting service where Mercurial clients
can fetch them.
2. A manifest file listing available bundle URLs and some
optional metadata is added to the Mercurial repository on the
server.
3. A client initiates a clone against a clone bundles aware
server.
4. The client sees the server is advertising clone bundles and
fetches the manifest listing available bundles.
5. The client filters and sorts the available bundles based on
what it supports and prefers.
6. The client downloads and applies an available bundle from the
server-specified URL.
7. The client reconnects to the original server and performs the
equivalent of hg pull to retrieve all repository data not in
the bundle. (The repository could have been updated between
when the bundle was created and when the client started the
clone.) This may use "pullbundles".
Instead of the server generating full repository bundles for
every clone request, it generates full bundles once and they are
subsequently reused to bootstrap new clones. The server may still
transfer data at clone time. However, this is only data that has
been added/changed since the bundle was created. For large,
established repositories, this can reduce server load for clones
to less than 1% of original.
Here's how pullbundles work:
1. A manifest file listing available bundles and describing the
revisions is added to the Mercurial repository on the server.
2. A new-enough client informs the server that it supports
partial pulls and initiates a pull.
3. If the server has pull bundles enabled and sees the client
advertising partial pulls, it checks for a matching pull
bundle in the manifest. A bundle matches if the format is
supported by the client, the client has the required revisions
already and needs something from the bundle.
4. If there is at least one matching bundle, the server sends it
to the client.
5. The client applies the bundle and notices that the server
reply was incomplete. It initiates another pull.
To work, this extension requires the following of server
operators:
• Generating bundle files of repository content (typically
periodically, such as once per day).
• Clone bundles: A file server that clients have network access
to and that Python knows how to talk to through its normal URL
handling facility (typically an HTTP/HTTPS server).
• A process for keeping the bundles manifest in sync with
available bundle files.
Strictly speaking, using a static file hosting server isn't
required: a server operator could use a dynamic service for
retrieving bundle data. However, static file hosting services are
simple and scalable and should be sufficient for most needs.
Bundle files can be generated with the hg bundle command.
Typically hg bundle --all is used to produce a bundle of the
entire repository.
hg debugcreatestreamclonebundle can be used to produce a special
streaming clonebundle. These are bundle files that are extremely
efficient to produce and consume (read: fast). However, they are
larger than traditional bundle formats and require that clients
support the exact set of repository data store formats in use by
the repository that created them. Typically, a newer server can
serve data that is compatible with older clients. However,
streaming clone bundles don't have this guarantee. Server
operators need to be aware that newer versions of Mercurial may
produce streaming clone bundles incompatible with older Mercurial
versions.
A server operator is responsible for creating a
.hg/clonebundles.manifest file containing the list of available
bundle files suitable for seeding clones. If this file does not
exist, the repository will not advertise the existence of clone
bundles when clients connect. For pull bundles,
.hg/pullbundles.manifest is used.
The manifest file contains a newline (n) delimited list of
entries.
Each line in this file defines an available bundle. Lines have
the format:
<URL> [<key>=<value>[ <key>=<value>]]
That is, a URL followed by an optional, space-delimited list of
key=value pairs describing additional properties of this bundle.
Both keys and values are URI encoded.
For pull bundles, the URL is a path under the .hg directory of
the repository.
Keys in UPPERCASE are reserved for use by Mercurial and are
defined below. All non-uppercase keys can be used by site
installations. An example use for custom properties is to use the
datacenter attribute to define which data center a file is hosted
in. Clients could then prefer a server in the data center closest
to them.
The following reserved keys are currently defined:
BUNDLESPEC
A "bundle specification" string that describes the type of
the bundle.
These are string values that are accepted by the "--type"
argument of hg bundle.
The values are parsed in strict mode, which means they
must be of the "<compression>-<type>" form. See
mercurial.exchange.parsebundlespec() for more details.
hg debugbundle --spec can be used to print the bundle
specification string for a bundle file. The output of this
command can be used verbatim for the value of BUNDLESPEC
(it is already escaped).
Clients will automatically filter out specifications that
are unknown or unsupported so they won't attempt to
download something that likely won't apply.
The actual value doesn't impact client behavior beyond
filtering: clients will still sniff the bundle type from
the header of downloaded files.
Use of this key is highly recommended, as it allows
clients to easily skip unsupported bundles. If this key is
not defined, an old client may attempt to apply a bundle
that it is incapable of reading.
REQUIRESNI
Whether Server Name Indication (SNI) is required to
connect to the URL. SNI allows servers to use multiple
certificates on the same IP. It is somewhat common in CDNs
and other hosting providers. Older Python versions do not
support SNI. Defining this attribute enables clients with
older Python versions to filter this entry without
experiencing an opaque SSL failure at connection time.
If this is defined, it is important to advertise a non-SNI
fallback URL or clients running old Python releases may
not be able to clone with the clonebundles facility.
Value should be "true".
REQUIREDRAM
Value specifies expected memory requirements to decode the
payload. Values can have suffixes for common bytes sizes.
e.g. "64MB".
This key is often used with zstd-compressed bundles using
a high compression level / window size, which can require
100+ MB of memory to decode.
heads Used for pull bundles. This contains the ; separated
changeset hashes of the heads of the bundle content.
bases Used for pull bundles. This contains the ; separated
changeset hashes of the roots of the bundle content. This
can be skipped if the bundle was created without --base.
Manifests can contain multiple entries. Assuming metadata is
defined, clients will filter entries from the manifest that they
don't support. The remaining entries are optionally sorted by
client preferences (ui.clonebundleprefers config option). The
client then attempts to fetch the bundle at the first URL in the
remaining list.
Errors when downloading a bundle will fail the entire clone
operation: clients do not automatically fall back to a
traditional clone. The reason for this is that if a server is
using clone bundles, it is probably doing so because the feature
is necessary to help it scale. In other words, there is an
assumption that clone load will be offloaded to another service
and that the Mercurial server isn't responsible for serving this
clone load. If that other service experiences issues and clients
start mass falling back to the original Mercurial server, the
added clone load could overwhelm the server due to unexpected
load and effectively take it offline. Not having clients
automatically fall back to cloning from the original server
mitigates this scenario.
Because there is no automatic Mercurial server fallback on
failure of the bundle hosting service, it is important for server
operators to view the bundle hosting service as an extension of
the Mercurial server in terms of availability and service level
agreements: if the bundle hosting service goes down, so does the
ability for clients to clone. Note: clients will see a message
informing them how to bypass the clone bundles facility when a
failure occurs. So server operators should prepare for some
people to follow these instructions when a failure occurs, thus
driving more load to the original Mercurial server when the
bundle hosting service fails.
closehead
close arbitrary heads without checking them out first
Commands
Change manipulation
close-head
close the given head revisions:
hg close-head [OPTION]... [REV]...
This is equivalent to checking out each revision in a clean tree
and running hg commit --close-branch, except that it doesn't
change the working directory.
The commit message must be specified with -l or -m.
Options:
-m,--message <TEXT>
use text as commit message
-l,--logfile <FILE>
read commit message from file
-d,--date <DATE>
record the specified date as commit date
-u,--user <USER>
record the specified user as committer
-r,--rev <REV[+]>
revision to check
[+] marked option can be specified multiple times
aliases: close-heads
commitextras
adds a new flag extras to commit (ADVANCED)
convert
import revisions from foreign VCS repositories into Mercurial
Commands
Uncategorized commands
convert
convert a foreign SCM repository to a Mercurial one.:
hg convert [OPTION]... SOURCE [DEST [REVMAP]]
Accepted source formats [identifiers]:
• Mercurial [hg]
• CVS [cvs]
• Darcs [darcs]
• git [git]
• Subversion [svn]
• Monotone [mtn]
• GNU Arch [gnuarch]
• Bazaar [bzr]
• Perforce [p4]
Accepted destination formats [identifiers]:
• Mercurial [hg]
• Subversion [svn] (history on branches is not preserved)
If no revision is given, all revisions will be converted.
Otherwise, convert will only import up to the named revision
(given in a format understood by the source).
If no destination directory name is specified, it defaults to the
basename of the source with -hg appended. If the destination
repository doesn't exist, it will be created.
By default, all sources except Mercurial will use --branchsort.
Mercurial uses --sourcesort to preserve original revision numbers
order. Sort modes have the following effects:
--branchsort
convert from parent to child revision when possible, which
means branches are usually converted one after the other.
It generates more compact repositories.
--datesort
sort revisions by date. Converted repositories have
good-looking changelogs but are often an order of
magnitude larger than the same ones generated by
--branchsort.
--sourcesort
try to preserve source revisions order, only supported by
Mercurial sources.
--closesort
try to move closed revisions as close as possible to
parent branches, only supported by Mercurial sources.
If REVMAP isn't given, it will be put in a default location
(<dest>/.hg/shamap by default). The REVMAP is a simple text file
that maps each source commit ID to the destination ID for that
revision, like so:
<source ID> <destination ID>
If the file doesn't exist, it's automatically created. It's
updated on each commit copied, so hg convert can be interrupted
and can be run repeatedly to copy new commits.
The authormap is a simple text file that maps each source commit
author to a destination commit author. It is handy for source
SCMs that use unix logins to identify authors (e.g.: CVS). One
line per author mapping and the line format is:
source author = destination author
Empty lines and lines starting with a # are ignored.
The filemap is a file that allows filtering and remapping of
files and directories. Each line can contain one of the following
directives:
include path/to/file-or-dir
exclude path/to/file-or-dir
rename path/to/source path/to/destination
Comment lines start with #. A specified path matches if it equals
the full relative name of a file or one of its parent
directories. The include or exclude directive with the longest
matching path applies, so line order does not matter.
The include directive causes a file, or all files under a
directory, to be included in the destination repository. The
default if there are no include statements is to include
everything. If there are any include statements, nothing else is
included. The exclude directive causes files or directories to
be omitted. The rename directive renames a file or directory if
it is converted. To rename from a subdirectory into the root of
the repository, use . as the path to rename to.
--full will make sure the converted changesets contain exactly
the right files with the right content. It will make a full
conversion of all files, not just the ones that have changed.
Files that already are correct will not be changed. This can be
used to apply filemap changes when converting incrementally. This
is currently only supported for Mercurial and Subversion.
The splicemap is a file that allows insertion of synthetic
history, letting you specify the parents of a revision. This is
useful if you want to e.g. give a Subversion merge two parents,
or graft two disconnected series of history together. Each entry
contains a key, followed by a space, followed by one or two
comma-separated values:
key parent1, parent2
The key is the revision ID in the source revision control system
whose parents should be modified (same format as a key in
.hg/shamap). The values are the revision IDs (in either the
source or destination revision control system) that should be
used as the new parents for that node. For example, if you have
merged "release-1.0" into "trunk", then you should specify the
revision on "trunk" as the first parent and the one on the
"release-1.0" branch as the second.
The branchmap is a file that allows you to rename a branch when
it is being brought in from whatever external repository. When
used in conjunction with a splicemap, it allows for a powerful
combination to help fix even the most badly mismanaged
repositories and turn them into nicely structured Mercurial
repositories. The branchmap contains lines of the form:
original_branch_name new_branch_name
where "original_branch_name" is the name of the branch in the
source repository, and "new_branch_name" is the name of the
branch is the destination repository. No whitespace is allowed in
the new branch name. This can be used to (for instance) move code
in one repository from "default" to a named branch.
Mercurial Source
The Mercurial source recognizes the following configuration
options, which you can set on the command line with --config:
convert.hg.ignoreerrors
ignore integrity errors when reading. Use it to fix
Mercurial repositories with missing revlogs, by converting
from and to Mercurial. Default is False.
convert.hg.saverev
store original revision ID in changeset (forces target IDs
to change). It takes a boolean argument and defaults to
False.
convert.hg.startrev
specify the initial Mercurial revision. The default is 0.
convert.hg.revs
revset specifying the source revisions to convert.
Bazaar Source
The following options can be used with --config:
convert.bzr.saverev
whether to store the original Bazaar commit ID in the
metadata of the destination commit. The default is True.
CVS Source
CVS source will use a sandbox (i.e. a checked-out copy) from CVS
to indicate the starting point of what will be converted. Direct
access to the repository files is not needed, unless of course
the repository is :local:. The conversion uses the top level
directory in the sandbox to find the CVS repository, and then
uses CVS rlog commands to find files to convert. This means that
unless a filemap is given, all files under the starting directory
will be converted, and that any directory reorganization in the
CVS sandbox is ignored.
The following options can be used with --config:
convert.cvsps.cache
Set to False to disable remote log caching, for testing
and debugging purposes. Default is True.
convert.cvsps.fuzz
Specify the maximum time (in seconds) that is allowed
between commits with identical user and log message in a
single changeset. When very large files were checked in as
part of a changeset then the default may not be long
enough. The default is 60.
convert.cvsps.logencoding
Specify encoding name to be used for transcoding CVS log
messages. Multiple encoding names can be specified as a
list (see hg help config.Syntax), but only the first
acceptable encoding in the list is used per CVS log
entries. This transcoding is executed before cvslog hook
below.
convert.cvsps.mergeto
Specify a regular expression to which commit log messages
are matched. If a match occurs, then the conversion
process will insert a dummy revision merging the branch on
which this log message occurs to the branch indicated in
the regex. Default is {{mergetobranch ([-\w]+)}}
convert.cvsps.mergefrom
Specify a regular expression to which commit log messages
are matched. If a match occurs, then the conversion
process will add the most recent revision on the branch
indicated in the regex as the second parent of the
changeset. Default is {{mergefrombranch ([-\w]+)}}
convert.localtimezone
use local time (as determined by the TZ environment
variable) for changeset date/times. The default is False
(use UTC).
hooks.cvslog
Specify a Python function to be called at the end of
gathering the CVS log. The function is passed a list with
the log entries, and can modify the entries in-place, or
add or delete them.
hooks.cvschangesets
Specify a Python function to be called after the
changesets are calculated from the CVS log. The function
is passed a list with the changeset entries, and can
modify the changesets in-place, or add or delete them.
An additional "debugcvsps" Mercurial command allows the builtin
changeset merging code to be run without doing a conversion. Its
parameters and output are similar to that of cvsps 2.1. Please
see the command help for more details.
Subversion Source
Subversion source detects classical trunk/branches/tags layouts.
By default, the supplied svn://repo/path/ source URL is converted
as a single branch. If svn://repo/path/trunk exists it replaces
the default branch. If svn://repo/path/branches exists, its
subdirectories are listed as possible branches. If
svn://repo/path/tags exists, it is looked for tags referencing
converted branches. Default trunk, branches and tags values can
be overridden with following options. Set them to paths relative
to the source URL, or leave them blank to disable auto detection.
The following options can be set with --config:
convert.svn.branches
specify the directory containing branches. The default is
branches.
convert.svn.tags
specify the directory containing tags. The default is
tags.
convert.svn.trunk
specify the name of the trunk branch. The default is
trunk.
convert.localtimezone
use local time (as determined by the TZ environment
variable) for changeset date/times. The default is False
(use UTC).
Source history can be retrieved starting at a specific revision,
instead of being integrally converted. Only single branch
conversions are supported.
convert.svn.startrev
specify start Subversion revision number. The default is
0.
Git Source
The Git importer converts commits from all reachable branches
(refs in refs/heads) and remotes (refs in refs/remotes) to
Mercurial. Branches are converted to bookmarks with the same
name, with the leading 'refs/heads' stripped. Git submodules are
converted to Git subrepos in Mercurial.
The following options can be set with --config:
convert.git.similarity
specify how similar files modified in a commit must be to
be imported as renames or copies, as a percentage between
0 (disabled) and 100 (files must be identical). For
example, 90 means that a delete/add pair will be imported
as a rename if more than 90% of the file hasn't changed.
The default is 50.
convert.git.findcopiesharder
while detecting copies, look at all files in the working
copy instead of just changed ones. This is very expensive
for large projects, and is only effective when
convert.git.similarity is greater than 0. The default is
False.
convert.git.renamelimit
perform rename and copy detection up to this many changed
files in a commit. Increasing this will make rename and
copy detection more accurate but will significantly slow
down computation on large projects. The option is only
relevant if convert.git.similarity is greater than 0. The
default is 400.
convert.git.committeractions
list of actions to take when processing author and
committer values.
Git commits have separate author (who wrote the commit)
and committer (who applied the commit) fields. Not all
destinations support separate author and committer fields
(including Mercurial). This config option controls what to
do with these author and committer fields during
conversion.
A value of messagedifferent will append a committer: ...
line to the commit message if the Git committer is
different from the author. The prefix of that line can be
specified using the syntax messagedifferent=<prefix>. e.g.
messagedifferent=git-committer:. When a prefix is
specified, a space will always be inserted between the
prefix and the value.
messagealways behaves like messagedifferent except it will
always result in a committer: ... line being appended to
the commit message. This value is mutually exclusive with
messagedifferent.
dropcommitter will remove references to the committer.
Only references to the author will remain. Actions that
add references to the committer will have no effect when
this is set.
replaceauthor will replace the value of the author field
with the committer. Other actions that add references to
the committer will still take effect when this is set.
The default is messagedifferent.
convert.git.extrakeys
list of extra keys from commit metadata to copy to the
destination. Some Git repositories store extra metadata in
commits. By default, this non-default metadata will be
lost during conversion. Setting this config option can
retain that metadata. Some built-in keys such as parent
and branch are not allowed to be copied.
convert.git.remoteprefix
remote refs are converted as bookmarks with
convert.git.remoteprefix as a prefix followed by a /. The
default is 'remote'.
convert.git.saverev
whether to store the original Git commit ID in the
metadata of the destination commit. The default is True.
convert.git.skipsubmodules
does not convert root level .gitmodules files or files
with 160000 mode indicating a submodule. Default is False.
Perforce Source
The Perforce (P4) importer can be given a p4 depot path or a
client specification as source. It will convert all files in the
source to a flat Mercurial repository, ignoring labels, branches
and integrations. Note that when a depot path is given you then
usually should specify a target directory, because otherwise the
target may be named ...-hg.
The following options can be set with --config:
convert.p4.encoding
specify the encoding to use when decoding standard output
of the Perforce command line tool. The default is default
system encoding.
convert.p4.startrev
specify initial Perforce revision (a Perforce changelist
number).
Mercurial Destination
The Mercurial destination will recognize Mercurial
subrepositories in the destination directory, and update the
.hgsubstate file automatically if the destination subrepositories
contain the <dest>/<sub>/.hg/shamap file. Converting a
repository with subrepositories requires converting a single
repository at a time, from the bottom up.
An example showing how to convert a repository with
subrepositories:
# so convert knows the type when it sees a non empty destination
$ hg init converted
$ hg convert orig/sub1 converted/sub1
$ hg convert orig/sub2 converted/sub2
$ hg convert orig converted
The following options are supported:
convert.hg.clonebranches
dispatch source branches in separate clones. The default
is False.
convert.hg.tagsbranch
branch name for tag revisions, defaults to default.
convert.hg.usebranchnames
preserve branch names. The default is True.
convert.hg.sourcename
records the given string as a 'convert_source' extra value
on each commit made in the target repository. The default
is None.
convert.hg.preserve-hash
only works with mercurial sources. Make convert prevent
performance improvement to the list of modified files in
commits when such an improvement would cause the hash of a
commit to change. The default is False.
All Destinations
All destination types accept the following options:
convert.skiptags
does not convert tags from the source repo to the target
repo. The default is False.
Subversion Destination
Original commit dates are not preserved by default.
convert.svn.dangerous-set-commit-dates
preserve original commit dates, forcefully setting
svn:date revision properties. This option is DANGEROUS and
may break some subversion functionality for the resulting
repository (e.g. filtering revisions with date ranges in
svn log), as original commit dates are not guaranteed to
be monotonically increasing.
For commit dates setting to work destination repository must have
pre-revprop-change hook configured to allow setting of svn:date
revision properties. See Subversion documentation for more
details.
Options:
--authors <FILE>
username mapping filename (DEPRECATED) (use --authormap
instead)
-s,--source-type <TYPE>
source repository type
-d,--dest-type <TYPE>
destination repository type
-r,--rev <REV[+]>
import up to source revision REV
-A,--authormap <FILE>
remap usernames using this file
--filemap <FILE>
remap file names using contents of file
--full apply filemap changes by converting all files again
--splicemap <FILE>
splice synthesized history into place
--branchmap <FILE>
change branch names while converting
--branchsort
try to sort changesets by branches
--datesort
try to sort changesets by date
--sourcesort
preserve source changesets order
--closesort
try to reorder closed revisions
[+] marked option can be specified multiple times
eol
automatically manage newlines in repository files
This extension allows you to manage the type of line endings
(CRLF or LF) that are used in the repository and in the local
working directory. That way you can get CRLF line endings on
Windows and LF on Unix/Mac, thereby letting everybody use their
OS native line endings.
The extension reads its configuration from a versioned .hgeol
configuration file found in the root of the working directory.
The .hgeol file use the same syntax as all other Mercurial
configuration files. It uses two sections, [patterns] and
[repository].
The [patterns] section specifies how line endings should be
converted between the working directory and the repository. The
format is specified by a file pattern. The first match is used,
so put more specific patterns first. The available line endings
are LF, CRLF, and BIN.
Files with the declared format of CRLF or LF are always checked
out and stored in the repository in that format and files
declared to be binary (BIN) are left unchanged. Additionally,
native is an alias for checking out in the platform's default
line ending: LF on Unix (including Mac OS X) and CRLF on Windows.
Note that BIN (do nothing to line endings) is Mercurial's default
behavior; it is only needed if you need to override a later, more
general pattern.
The optional [repository] section specifies the line endings to
use for files stored in the repository. It has a single setting,
native, which determines the storage line endings for files
declared as native in the [patterns] section. It can be set to LF
or CRLF. The default is LF. For example, this means that on
Windows, files configured as native (CRLF by default) will be
converted to LF when stored in the repository. Files declared as
LF, CRLF, or BIN in the [patterns] section are always stored
as-is in the repository.
Example versioned .hgeol file:
[patterns]
**.py = native
**.vcproj = CRLF
**.txt = native
Makefile = LF
**.jpg = BIN
[repository]
native = LF
Note The rules will first apply when files are touched in the
working directory, e.g. by updating to null and back to
tip to touch all files.
The extension uses an optional [eol] section read from both the
normal Mercurial configuration files and the .hgeol file, with
the latter overriding the former. You can use that section to
control the overall behavior. There are three settings:
• eol.native (default os.linesep) can be set to LF or CRLF to
override the default interpretation of native for checkout.
This can be used with hg archive on Unix, say, to generate an
archive where files have line endings for Windows.
• eol.only-consistent (default True) can be set to False to make
the extension convert files with inconsistent EOLs.
Inconsistent means that there is both CRLF and LF present in
the file. Such files are normally not touched under the
assumption that they have mixed EOLs on purpose.
• eol.fix-trailing-newline (default False) can be set to True to
ensure that converted files end with a EOL character (either \n
or \r\n as per the configured patterns).
The extension provides cleverencode: and cleverdecode: filters
like the deprecated win32text extension does. This means that you
can disable win32text and enable eol and your filters will still
work. You only need to these filters until you have prepared a
.hgeol file.
The win32text.forbid* hooks provided by the win32text extension
have been unified into a single hook named eol.checkheadshook.
The hook will lookup the expected line endings from the .hgeol
file, which means you must migrate to a .hgeol file first before
using the hook. eol.checkheadshook only checks heads,
intermediate invalid revisions will be pushed. To forbid them
completely, use the eol.checkallhook hook. These hooks are best
used as pretxnchangegroup hooks.
See hg help patterns for more information about the glob patterns
used.
extdiff
command to allow external programs to compare revisions
The extdiff Mercurial extension allows you to use external
programs to compare revisions, or revision with working
directory. The external diff programs are called with a
configurable set of options and two non-option arguments: paths
to directories containing snapshots of files to compare.
If there is more than one file being compared and the "child"
revision is the working directory, any modifications made in the
external diff program will be copied back to the working
directory from the temporary directory.
The extdiff extension also allows you to configure new diff
commands, so you do not need to type hg extdiff -p kdiff3 always.
[extdiff]
# add new command that runs GNU diff(1) in 'context diff' mode
cdiff = gdiff -Nprc5
## or the old way:
#cmd.cdiff = gdiff
#opts.cdiff = -Nprc5
# add new command called meld, runs meld (no need to name twice). If
# the meld executable is not available, the meld tool in [merge-tools]
# will be used, if available
meld =
# add new command called vimdiff, runs gvimdiff with DirDiff plugin
# (see http://www.vim.org/scripts/script.php?script_id=102) Non
# English user, be sure to put "let g:DirDiffDynamicDiffText = 1" in
# your .vimrc
vimdiff = gvim -f "+next" \
"+execute 'DirDiff' fnameescape(argv(0)) fnameescape(argv(1))"
Tool arguments can include variables that are expanded at
runtime:
$parent1, $plabel1 - filename, descriptive label of first parent
$child, $clabel - filename, descriptive label of child revision
$parent2, $plabel2 - filename, descriptive label of second parent
$root - repository root
$parent is an alias for $parent1.
The extdiff extension will look in your [diff-tools] and
[merge-tools] sections for diff tool arguments, when none are
specified in [extdiff].
[extdiff]
kdiff3 =
[diff-tools]
kdiff3.diffargs=--L1 '$plabel1' --L2 '$clabel' $parent $child
If a program has a graphical interface, it might be interesting
to tell Mercurial about it. It will prevent the program from
being mistakenly used in a terminal-only environment (such as an
SSH terminal session), and will make hg extdiff --per-file open
multiple file diffs at once instead of one by one (if you still
want to open file diffs one by one, you can use the --confirm
option).
Declaring that a tool has a graphical interface can be done with
the gui flag next to where diffargs are specified:
[diff-tools]
kdiff3.diffargs=--L1 '$plabel1' --L2 '$clabel' $parent $child
kdiff3.gui = true
You can use -I/-X and list of file or directory names like normal
hg diff command. The extdiff extension makes snapshots of only
needed files, so running the external diff program will actually
be pretty fast (at least faster than having to compare the entire
tree).
Commands
File content management
extdiff
use external program to diff repository (or selected files):
hg extdiff [OPT]... [FILE]...
Show differences between revisions for the specified files, using
an external program. The default program used is diff, with
default options "-Npru".
To select a different program, use the -p/--program option. The
program will be passed the names of two directories to compare,
unless the --per-file option is specified (see below). To pass
additional options to the program, use -o/--option. These will be
passed before the names of the directories or files to compare.
The --from, --to, and --change options work the same way they do
for hg diff.
The --per-file option runs the external program repeatedly on
each file to diff, instead of once on two directories. By
default, this happens one by one, where the next file diff is
open in the external program only once the previous external
program (for the previous file diff) has exited. If the external
program has a graphical interface, it can open all the file diffs
at once instead of one by one. See hg help -e extdiff for
information about how to tell Mercurial that a given program has
a graphical interface.
The --confirm option will prompt the user before each invocation
of the external program. It is ignored if --per-file isn't
specified.
Options:
-p,--program <CMD>
comparison program to run
-o,--option <OPT[+]>
pass option to comparison program
-r,--rev <REV[+]>
revision (DEPRECATED)
--from <REV1>
revision to diff from
--to <REV2>
revision to diff to
-c,--change <REV>
change made by revision
--per-file
compare each file instead of revision snapshots
--confirm
prompt user before each external program invocation
--patch
compare patches for two revisions
-I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
include names matching the given patterns
-X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
exclude names matching the given patterns
-S, --subrepos
recurse into subrepositories
[+] marked option can be specified multiple times
factotum
http authentication with factotum
This extension allows the factotum(4) facility on Plan 9 from
Bell Labs platforms to provide authentication information for
HTTP access. Configuration entries specified in the auth section
as well as authentication information provided in the repository
URL are fully supported. If no prefix is specified, a value of
"*" will be assumed.
By default, keys are specified as:
proto=pass service=hg prefix=<prefix> user=<username> !password=<password>
If the factotum extension is unable to read the required key, one
will be requested interactively.
A configuration section is available to customize runtime
behavior. By default, these entries are:
[factotum]
executable = /bin/auth/factotum
mountpoint = /mnt/factotum
service = hg
The executable entry defines the full path to the factotum
binary. The mountpoint entry defines the path to the factotum
file service. Lastly, the service entry controls the service name
used when reading keys.
fastannotate
yet another annotate implementation that might be faster
(EXPERIMENTAL)
The fastannotate extension provides a 'fastannotate' command that
makes use of the linelog data structure as a cache layer and is
expected to be faster than the vanilla 'annotate' if the cache is
present.
In most cases, fastannotate requires a setup that mainbranch is
some pointer that always moves forward, to be most efficient.
Using fastannotate together with linkrevcache would speed up
building the annotate cache greatly. Run "debugbuildlinkrevcache"
before "debugbuildannotatecache".
[fastannotate]
# specify the main branch head. the internal linelog will only contain
# the linear (ignoring p2) "mainbranch". since linelog cannot move
# backwards without a rebuild, this should be something that always moves
# forward, usually it is "master" or "@".
mainbranch = master
# fastannotate supports different modes to expose its feature.
# a list of combination:
# - fastannotate: expose the feature via the "fastannotate" command which
# deals with everything in a most efficient way, and provides extra
# features like --deleted etc.
# - fctx: replace fctx.annotate implementation. note:
# a. it is less efficient than the "fastannotate" command
# b. it will make it practically impossible to access the old (disk
# side-effect free) annotate implementation
# c. it implies "hgweb".
# - hgweb: replace hgweb's annotate implementation. conflict with "fctx".
# (default: fastannotate)
modes = fastannotate
# default format when no format flags are used (default: number)
defaultformat = changeset, user, date
# serve the annotate cache via wire protocol (default: False)
# tip: the .hg/fastannotate directory is portable - can be rsynced
server = True
# build annotate cache on demand for every client request (default: True)
# disabling it could make server response faster, useful when there is a
# cronjob building the cache.
serverbuildondemand = True
# update local annotate cache from remote on demand
client = False
# path to use when connecting to the remote server (default: default)
remotepath = default
# minimal length of the history of a file required to fetch linelog from
# the server. (default: 10)
clientfetchthreshold = 10
# for "fctx" mode, always follow renames regardless of command line option.
# this is a BC with the original command but will reduced the space needed
# for annotate cache, and is useful for client-server setup since the
# server will only provide annotate cache with default options (i.e. with
# follow). do not affect "fastannotate" mode. (default: True)
forcefollow = True
# for "fctx" mode, always treat file as text files, to skip the "isbinary"
# check. this is consistent with the "fastannotate" command and could help
# to avoid a file fetch if remotefilelog is used. (default: True)
forcetext = True
# use unfiltered repo for better performance.
unfilteredrepo = True
# sacrifice correctness in some corner cases for performance. it does not
# affect the correctness of the annotate cache being built. the option
# is experimental and may disappear in the future (default: False)
perfhack = True
Commands
Uncategorized commands
fastexport
export repositories as git fast-import stream
Commands
Change import/export
fastexport
export repository as git fast-import stream:
hg fastexport [OPTION]... [REV]...
This command lets you dump a repository as a human-readable text
stream. It can be piped into corresponding import routines like
"git fast-import". Incremental dumps can be created by using
marks files.
Options:
-r,--rev <REV[+]>
revisions to export
-i,--import-marks <FILE>
old marks file to read
-e,--export-marks <FILE>
new marks file to write
-A,--authormap <FILE>
remap usernames using this file
[+] marked option can be specified multiple times
fetch
pull, update and merge in one command (DEPRECATED)
Commands
Remote repository management
fetch
pull changes from a remote repository, merge new changes if
needed.:
hg fetch [SOURCE]
This finds all changes from the repository at the specified path
or URL and adds them to the local repository.
If the pulled changes add a new branch head, the head is
automatically merged, and the result of the merge is committed.
Otherwise, the working directory is updated to include the new
changes.
When a merge is needed, the working directory is first updated to
the newly pulled changes. Local changes are then merged into the
pulled changes. To switch the merge order, use --switch-parent.
See hg help dates for a list of formats valid for -d/--date.
Returns 0 on success.
Options:
-r,--rev <REV[+]>
a specific revision you would like to pull
--edit invoke editor on commit messages
--force-editor
edit commit message (DEPRECATED)
--switch-parent
switch parents when merging
-m,--message <TEXT>
use text as commit message
-l,--logfile <FILE>
read commit message from file
-d,--date <DATE>
record the specified date as commit date
-u,--user <USER>
record the specified user as committer
-e,--ssh <CMD>
specify ssh command to use
--remotecmd <CMD>
specify hg command to run on the remote side
--insecure
do not verify server certificate (ignoring web.cacerts
config)
[+] marked option can be specified multiple times
fix
rewrite file content in changesets or working copy (EXPERIMENTAL)
Provides a command that runs configured tools on the contents of
modified files, writing back any fixes to the working copy or
replacing changesets.
Here is an example configuration that causes hg fix to apply
automatic formatting fixes to modified lines in C++ code:
[fix]
clang-format:command=clang-format --assume-filename={rootpath}
clang-format:linerange=--lines={first}:{last}
clang-format:pattern=set:**.cpp or **.hpp
The :command suboption forms the first part of the shell command
that will be used to fix a file. The content of the file is
passed on standard input, and the fixed file content is expected
on standard output. Any output on standard error will be
displayed as a warning. If the exit status is not zero, the file
will not be affected. A placeholder warning is displayed if there
is a non-zero exit status but no standard error output. Some
values may be substituted into the command:
{rootpath} The path of the file being fixed, relative to the repo root
{basename} The name of the file being fixed, without the directory path
If the :linerange suboption is set, the tool will only be run if
there are changed lines in a file. The value of this suboption is
appended to the shell command once for every range of changed
lines in the file. Some values may be substituted into the
command:
{first} The 1-based line number of the first line in the modified range
{last} The 1-based line number of the last line in the modified range
Deleted sections of a file will be ignored by :linerange, because
there is no corresponding line range in the version being fixed.
By default, tools that set :linerange will only be executed if
there is at least one changed line range. This is meant to
prevent accidents like running a code formatter in such a way
that it unexpectedly reformats the whole file. If such a tool
needs to operate on unchanged files, it should set the :skipclean
suboption to false.
The :pattern suboption determines which files will be passed
through each configured tool. See hg help patterns for possible
values. However, all patterns are relative to the repo root, even
if that text says they are relative to the current working
directory. If there are file arguments to hg fix, the
intersection of these patterns is used.
There is also a configurable limit for the maximum size of file
that will be processed by hg fix:
[fix]
maxfilesize = 2MB
Normally, execution of configured tools will continue after a
failure (indicated by a non-zero exit status). It can also be
configured to abort after the first such failure, so that no
files will be affected if any tool fails. This abort will also
cause hg fix to exit with a non-zero status:
[fix]
failure = abort
When multiple tools are configured to affect a file, they execute
in an order defined by the :priority suboption. The priority
suboption has a default value of zero for each tool. Tools are
executed in order of descending priority. The execution order of
tools with equal priority is unspecified. For example, you could
use the 'sort' and 'head' utilities to keep only the 10 smallest
numbers in a text file by ensuring that 'sort' runs before
'head':
[fix]
sort:command = sort -n
head:command = head -n 10
sort:pattern = numbers.txt
head:pattern = numbers.txt
sort:priority = 2
head:priority = 1
To account for changes made by each tool, the line numbers used
for incremental formatting are recomputed before executing the
next tool. So, each tool may see different values for the
arguments added by the :linerange suboption.
Each fixer tool is allowed to return some metadata in addition to
the fixed file content. The metadata must be placed before the
file content on stdout, separated from the file content by a zero
byte. The metadata is parsed as a JSON value (so, it should be
UTF-8 encoded and contain no zero bytes). A fixer tool is
expected to produce this metadata encoding if and only if the
:metadata suboption is true:
[fix]
tool:command = tool --prepend-json-metadata
tool:metadata = true
The metadata values are passed to hooks, which can be used to
print summaries or perform other post-fixing work. The supported
hooks are:
"postfixfile"
Run once for each file in each revision where any fixer tools made changes
to the file content. Provides "$HG_REV" and "$HG_PATH" to identify the file,
and "$HG_METADATA" with a map of fixer names to metadata values from fixer
tools that affected the file. Fixer tools that didn't affect the file have a
value of None. Only fixer tools that executed are present in the metadata.
"postfix"
Run once after all files and revisions have been handled. Provides
"$HG_REPLACEMENTS" with information about what revisions were created and
made obsolete. Provides a boolean "$HG_WDIRWRITTEN" to indicate whether any
files in the working copy were updated. Provides a list "$HG_METADATA"
mapping fixer tool names to lists of metadata values returned from
executions that modified a file. This aggregates the same metadata
previously passed to the "postfixfile" hook.
Fixer tools are run in the repository's root directory. This
allows them to read configuration files from the working copy, or
even write to the working copy. The working copy is not updated
to match the revision being fixed. In fact, several revisions may
be fixed in parallel. Writes to the working copy are not amended
into the revision being fixed; fixer tools should always write
fixed file content back to stdout as documented above.
Commands
File content management
fix
rewrite file content in changesets or working directory:
hg fix [OPTION]... [FILE]...
Runs any configured tools to fix the content of files. Only
affects files with changes, unless file arguments are provided.
Only affects changed lines of files, unless the --whole flag is
used. Some tools may always affect the whole file regardless of
--whole.
If --working-dir is used, files with uncommitted changes in the
working copy will be fixed. Note that no backup are made.
If revisions are specified with --source, those revisions and
their descendants will be checked, and they may be replaced with
new revisions that have fixed file content. By automatically
including the descendants, no merging, rebasing, or evolution
will be required. If an ancestor of the working copy is included,
then the working copy itself will also be fixed, and the working
copy will be updated to the fixed parent.
When determining what lines of each file to fix at each revision,
the whole set of revisions being fixed is considered, so that
fixes to earlier revisions are not forgotten in later ones. The
--base flag can be used to override this default behavior, though
it is not usually desirable to do so.
Options:
--all fix all non-public non-obsolete revisions
--base <REV[+]>
revisions to diff against (overrides automatic selection,
and applies to every revision being fixed)
-r,--rev <REV[+]>
revisions to fix (ADVANCED)
-s,--source <REV[+]>
fix the specified revisions and their descendants
-w, --working-dir
fix the working directory
--whole
always fix every line of a file
[+] marked option can be specified multiple times
fsmonitor
Faster status operations with the Watchman file monitor
(EXPERIMENTAL)
Integrates the file-watching program Watchman with Mercurial to
produce faster status results.
On a particular Linux system, for a real-world repository with
over 400,000 files hosted on ext4, vanilla hg status takes 1.3
seconds. On the same system, with fsmonitor it takes about 0.3
seconds.
fsmonitor requires no configuration -- it will tell Watchman
about your repository as necessary. You'll need to install
Watchman from https://facebook.github.io/watchman/ and make sure
it is in your PATH.
fsmonitor is incompatible with the largefiles and eol extensions,
and will disable itself if any of those are active.
The following configuration options exist:
[fsmonitor]
mode = {off, on, paranoid}
When mode = off, fsmonitor will disable itself (similar to not
loading the extension at all). When mode = on, fsmonitor will be
enabled (the default). When mode = paranoid, fsmonitor will
query both Watchman and the filesystem, and ensure that the
results are consistent.
[fsmonitor]
timeout = (float)
A value, in seconds, that determines how long fsmonitor will wait
for Watchman to return results. Defaults to 2.0.
[fsmonitor]
blacklistusers = (list of userids)
A list of usernames for which fsmonitor will disable itself
altogether.
[fsmonitor]
walk_on_invalidate = (boolean)
Whether or not to walk the whole repo ourselves when our cached
state has been invalidated, for example when Watchman has been
restarted or .hgignore rules have been changed. Walking the repo
in that case can result in competing for I/O with Watchman. For
large repos it is recommended to set this value to false. You may
wish to set this to true if you have a very fast filesystem that
can outpace the IPC overhead of getting the result data for the
full repo from Watchman. Defaults to false.
[fsmonitor]
warn_when_unused = (boolean)
Whether to print a warning during certain operations when
fsmonitor would be beneficial to performance but isn't enabled.
[fsmonitor]
warn_update_file_count = (integer)
# or when mercurial is built with rust support
warn_update_file_count_rust = (integer)
If warn_when_unused is set and fsmonitor isn't enabled, a warning
will be printed during working directory updates if this many
files will be created.
git
grant Mercurial the ability to operate on Git repositories.
(EXPERIMENTAL)
This is currently super experimental. It probably will consume
your firstborn a la Rumpelstiltskin, etc.
githelp
try mapping git commands to Mercurial commands
Tries to map a given git command to a Mercurial command:
$ hg githelp -- git checkout master hg update master
If an unknown command or parameter combination is detected, an
error is produced.
Commands
Help
githelp
suggests the Mercurial equivalent of the given git command:
hg githelp
Usage: hg githelp -- <git command>
aliases: git
gpg
commands to sign and verify changesets
Commands
Signing changes (GPG)
sigcheck
verify all the signatures there may be for a particular revision:
hg sigcheck REV
verify all the signatures there may be for a particular revision
sign
add a signature for the current or given revision:
hg sign [OPTION]... [REV]...
If no revision is given, the parent of the working directory is
used, or tip if no revision is checked out.
The gpg.cmd config setting can be used to specify the command to
run. A default key can be specified with gpg.key.
See hg help dates for a list of formats valid for -d/--date.
Options:
-l, --local
make the signature local
-f, --force
sign even if the sigfile is modified
--no-commit
do not commit the sigfile after signing
-k,--key <ID>
the key id to sign with
-m,--message <TEXT>
use text as commit message
-e, --edit
invoke editor on commit messages
-d,--date <DATE>
record the specified date as commit date
-u,--user <USER>
record the specified user as committer
sigs
list signed changesets:
hg sigs
list signed changesets
graphlog
command to view revision graphs from a shell (DEPRECATED)
The functionality of this extension has been include in core
Mercurial since version 2.3. Please use hg log -G ... instead.
This extension adds a --graph option to the incoming, outgoing
and log commands. When this options is given, an ASCII
representation of the revision graph is also shown.
Commands
Change navigation
glog
show revision history alongside an ASCII revision graph:
hg glog [OPTION]... [FILE]
Print a revision history alongside a revision graph drawn with
ASCII characters.
Nodes printed as an @ character are parents of the working
directory.
This is an alias to hg log -G.
Options:
-f, --follow
follow changeset history, or file history across copies
and renames
--follow-first
only follow the first parent of merge changesets
(DEPRECATED)
-d,--date <DATE>
show revisions matching date spec
-C, --copies
show copied files
-k,--keyword <TEXT[+]>
do case-insensitive search for a given text
-r,--rev <REV[+]>
show the specified revision or revset
--removed
include revisions where files were removed
-m, --only-merges
show only merges (DEPRECATED)
-u,--user <USER[+]>
revisions committed by user
--only-branch <BRANCH[+]>
show only changesets within the given named branch
(DEPRECATED)
-b,--branch <BRANCH[+]>
show changesets within the given named branch
-P,--prune <REV[+]>
do not display revision or any of its ancestors
-p, --patch
show patch
-g, --git
use git extended diff format
-l,--limit <NUM>
limit number of changes displayed
-M, --no-merges
do not show merges
--stat output diffstat-style summary of changes
-G, --graph
show the revision DAG
--style <STYLE>
display using template map file (DEPRECATED)
-T,--template <TEMPLATE>
display with template
-I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
include names matching the given patterns
-X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
exclude names matching the given patterns
[+] marked option can be specified multiple times
hgk
browse the repository in a graphical way
The hgk extension allows browsing the history of a repository in
a graphical way. It requires Tcl/Tk version 8.4 or later. (Tcl/Tk
is not distributed with Mercurial.)
hgk consists of two parts: a Tcl script that does the displaying
and querying of information, and an extension to Mercurial named
hgk.py, which provides hooks for hgk to get information. hgk can
be found in the contrib directory, and the extension is shipped
in the hgext repository, and needs to be enabled.
The hg view command will launch the hgk Tcl script. For this
command to work, hgk must be in your search path. Alternately,
you can specify the path to hgk in your configuration file:
[hgk]
path = /location/of/hgk
hgk can make use of the extdiff extension to visualize revisions.
Assuming you had already configured extdiff vdiff command, just
add:
[hgk]
vdiff=vdiff
Revisions context menu will now display additional entries to
fire vdiff on hovered and selected revisions.
Commands
Change navigation
view
start interactive history viewer:
hg view [-l LIMIT] [REVRANGE]
start interactive history viewer
Options:
-l,--limit <NUM>
limit number of changes displayed
Uncategorized commands
highlight
syntax highlighting for hgweb (requires Pygments)
It depends on the Pygments syntax highlighting library:
http://pygments.org/
There are the following configuration options:
[web]
pygments_style = <style> (default: colorful)
highlightfiles = <fileset> (default: size('<5M'))
highlightonlymatchfilename = <bool> (default False)
highlightonlymatchfilename will only highlight files if their
type could be identified by their filename. When this is not
enabled (the default), Pygments will try very hard to identify
the file type from content and any match (even matches with a low
confidence score) will be used.
histedit
interactive history editing
With this extension installed, Mercurial gains one new command:
histedit. Usage is as follows, assuming the following history:
@ 3[tip] 7c2fd3b9020c 2009-04-27 18:04 -0500 durin42
| Add delta
|
o 2 030b686bedc4 2009-04-27 18:04 -0500 durin42
| Add gamma
|
o 1 c561b4e977df 2009-04-27 18:04 -0500 durin42
| Add beta
|
o 0 d8d2fcd0e319 2009-04-27 18:04 -0500 durin42
Add alpha
If you were to run hg histedit c561b4e977df, you would see the
following file open in your editor:
pick c561b4e977df Add beta
pick 030b686bedc4 Add gamma
pick 7c2fd3b9020c Add delta
# Edit history between c561b4e977df and 7c2fd3b9020c
#
# Commits are listed from least to most recent
#
# Commands:
# p, pick = use commit
# e, edit = use commit, but allow edits before making new commit
# f, fold = use commit, but combine it with the one above
# r, roll = like fold, but discard this commit's description and date
# d, drop = remove commit from history
# m, mess = edit commit message without changing commit content
# b, base = checkout changeset and apply further changesets from there
#
In this file, lines beginning with # are ignored. You must
specify a rule for each revision in your history. For example, if
you had meant to add gamma before beta, and then wanted to add
delta in the same revision as beta, you would reorganize the file
to look like this:
pick 030b686bedc4 Add gamma
pick c561b4e977df Add beta
fold 7c2fd3b9020c Add delta
# Edit history between c561b4e977df and 7c2fd3b9020c
#
# Commits are listed from least to most recent
#
# Commands:
# p, pick = use commit
# e, edit = use commit, but allow edits before making new commit
# f, fold = use commit, but combine it with the one above
# r, roll = like fold, but discard this commit's description and date
# d, drop = remove commit from history
# m, mess = edit commit message without changing commit content
# b, base = checkout changeset and apply further changesets from there
#
At which point you close the editor and histedit starts working.
When you specify a fold operation, histedit will open an editor
when it folds those revisions together, offering you a chance to
clean up the commit message:
Add beta
***
Add delta
Edit the commit message to your liking, then close the editor.
The date used for the commit will be the later of the two
commits' dates. For this example, let's assume that the commit
message was changed to Add beta and delta. After histedit has
run and had a chance to remove any old or temporary revisions it
needed, the history looks like this:
@ 2[tip] 989b4d060121 2009-04-27 18:04 -0500 durin42
| Add beta and delta.
|
o 1 081603921c3f 2009-04-27 18:04 -0500 durin42
| Add gamma
|
o 0 d8d2fcd0e319 2009-04-27 18:04 -0500 durin42
Add alpha
Note that histedit does not remove any revisions (even its own
temporary ones) until after it has completed all the editing
operations, so it will probably perform several strip operations
when it's done. For the above example, it had to run strip twice.
Strip can be slow depending on a variety of factors, so you might
need to be a little patient. You can choose to keep the original
revisions by passing the --keep flag.
The edit operation will drop you back to a command prompt,
allowing you to edit files freely, or even use hg record to
commit some changes as a separate commit. When you're done, any
remaining uncommitted changes will be committed as well. When
done, run hg histedit --continue to finish this step. If there
are uncommitted changes, you'll be prompted for a new commit
message, but the default commit message will be the original
message for the edit ed revision, and the date of the original
commit will be preserved.
The message operation will give you a chance to revise a commit
message without changing the contents. It's a shortcut for doing
edit immediately followed by hg histedit --continue`.
If histedit encounters a conflict when moving a revision (while
handling pick or fold), it'll stop in a similar manner to edit
with the difference that it won't prompt you for a commit message
when done. If you decide at this point that you don't like how
much work it will be to rearrange history, or that you made a
mistake, you can use hg histedit --abort to abandon the new
changes you have made and return to the state before you
attempted to edit your history.
If we clone the histedit-ed example repository above and add four
more changes, such that we have the following history:
@ 6[tip] 038383181893 2009-04-27 18:04 -0500 stefan
| Add theta
|
o 5 140988835471 2009-04-27 18:04 -0500 stefan
| Add eta
|
o 4 122930637314 2009-04-27 18:04 -0500 stefan
| Add zeta
|
o 3 836302820282 2009-04-27 18:04 -0500 stefan
| Add epsilon
|
o 2 989b4d060121 2009-04-27 18:04 -0500 durin42
| Add beta and delta.
|
o 1 081603921c3f 2009-04-27 18:04 -0500 durin42
| Add gamma
|
o 0 d8d2fcd0e319 2009-04-27 18:04 -0500 durin42
Add alpha
If you run hg histedit --outgoing on the clone then it is the
same as running hg histedit 836302820282. If you need plan to
push to a repository that Mercurial does not detect to be related
to the source repo, you can add a --force option.
Config
Histedit rule lines are truncated to 80 characters by default.
You can customize this behavior by setting a different length in
your configuration file:
[histedit]
linelen = 120 # truncate rule lines at 120 characters
The summary of a change can be customized as well:
[histedit]
summary-template = '{rev} {bookmarks} {desc|firstline}'
The customized summary should be kept short enough that rule
lines will fit in the configured line length. See above if that
requires customization.
hg histedit attempts to automatically choose an appropriate base
revision to use. To change which base revision is used, define a
revset in your configuration file:
[histedit]
defaultrev = only(.) & draft()
By default each edited revision needs to be present in histedit
commands. To remove revision you need to use drop operation. You
can configure the drop to be implicit for missing commits by
adding:
[histedit]
dropmissing = True
By default, histedit will close the transaction after each
action. For performance purposes, you can configure histedit to
use a single transaction across the entire histedit. WARNING:
This setting introduces a significant risk of losing the work
you've done in a histedit if the histedit aborts unexpectedly:
[histedit]
singletransaction = True
Commands
Change manipulation
histedit
interactively edit changeset history:
hg histedit [OPTIONS] ([ANCESTOR] | --outgoing [URL])
This command lets you edit a linear series of changesets (up to
and including the working directory, which should be clean). You
can:
• pick to [re]order a changeset
• drop to omit changeset
• mess to reword the changeset commit message
• fold to combine it with the preceding changeset (using the
later date)
• roll like fold, but discarding this commit's description and
date
• edit to edit this changeset (preserving date)
• base to checkout changeset and apply further changesets from
there
There are a number of ways to select the root changeset:
• Specify ANCESTOR directly
• Use --outgoing -- it will be the first linear changeset not
included in destination. (See hg help config.paths.default-push
)
• Otherwise, the value from the "histedit.defaultrev" config
option is used as a revset to select the base revision when
ANCESTOR is not specified. The first revision returned by the
revset is used. By default, this selects the editable history
that is unique to the ancestry of the working directory.
If you use --outgoing, this command will abort if there are
ambiguous outgoing revisions. For example, if there are multiple
branches containing outgoing revisions.
Use "min(outgoing() and ::.)" or similar revset specification
instead of --outgoing to specify edit target revision exactly in
such ambiguous situation. See hg help revsets for detail about
selecting revisions.
Examples:
• A number of changes have been made. Revision 3 is no longer
needed.
Start history editing from revision 3:
hg histedit -r 3
An editor opens, containing the list of revisions, with
specific actions specified:
pick 5339bf82f0ca 3 Zworgle the foobar
pick 8ef592ce7cc4 4 Bedazzle the zerlog
pick 0a9639fcda9d 5 Morgify the cromulancy
Additional information about the possible actions to take
appears below the list of revisions.
To remove revision 3 from the history, its action (at the
beginning of the relevant line) is changed to 'drop':
drop 5339bf82f0ca 3 Zworgle the foobar
pick 8ef592ce7cc4 4 Bedazzle the zerlog
pick 0a9639fcda9d 5 Morgify the cromulancy
• A number of changes have been made. Revision 2 and 4 need
to be swapped.
Start history editing from revision 2:
hg histedit -r 2
An editor opens, containing the list of revisions, with
specific actions specified:
pick 252a1af424ad 2 Blorb a morgwazzle
pick 5339bf82f0ca 3 Zworgle the foobar
pick 8ef592ce7cc4 4 Bedazzle the zerlog
To swap revision 2 and 4, its lines are swapped in the
editor:
pick 8ef592ce7cc4 4 Bedazzle the zerlog
pick 5339bf82f0ca 3 Zworgle the foobar
pick 252a1af424ad 2 Blorb a morgwazzle
Returns 0 on success, 1 if user intervention is required (not
only for intentional "edit" command, but also for resolving
unexpected conflicts).
Options:
--commands <FILE>
read history edits from the specified file
-c, --continue
continue an edit already in progress
--edit-plan
edit remaining actions list
-k, --keep
don't strip old nodes after edit is complete
--abort
abort an edit in progress
-o, --outgoing
changesets not found in destination
-f, --force
force outgoing even for unrelated repositories
-r,--rev <REV[+]>
first revision to be edited
-T,--template <TEMPLATE>
display with template
[+] marked option can be specified multiple times
hooklib
collection of simple hooks for common tasks (EXPERIMENTAL)
This extension provides a number of simple hooks to handle issues
commonly found in repositories with many contributors: - email
notification when changesets move from draft to public phase -
email notification when changesets are obsoleted - enforcement of
draft phase for all incoming changesets - enforcement of a
no-branch-merge policy - enforcement of a no-multiple-heads
policy
The implementation of the hooks is subject to change, e.g.
whether to implement them as individual hooks or merge them into
the notify extension as option. The functionality itself is
planned to be supported long-term.
infinitepush
store some pushes in a remote blob store on the server
(EXPERIMENTAL)
IMPORTANT: if you use this extension, please contact
mercurial-devel@mercurial-scm.org ASAP. This extension is
believed to be unused and barring learning of users of this
functionality, we will delete this code at the end of 2020.
[infinitepush] # Server-side and client-side option. Pattern
of the infinitepush bookmark branchpattern = PATTERN
# Server or client server = False
# Server-side option. Possible values: 'disk' or 'sql'. Fails
if not set indextype = disk
# Server-side option. Used only if indextype=sql. # Format:
'IP:PORT:DB_NAME:USER:PASSWORD' sqlhost =
IP:PORT:DB_NAME:USER:PASSWORD
# Server-side option. Used only if indextype=disk. #
Filesystem path to the index store indexpath = PATH
# Server-side option. Possible values: 'disk' or 'external' #
Fails if not set storetype = disk
# Server-side option. # Path to the binary that will save
bundle to the bundlestore # Formatted cmd line will be passed
to it (see put_args) put_binary = put
# Serser-side option. Used only if storetype=external. #
Format cmd-line string for put binary. Placeholder: {filename}
put_args = {filename}
# Server-side option. # Path to the binary that get bundle
from the bundlestore. # Formatted cmd line will be passed to
it (see get_args) get_binary = get
# Serser-side option. Used only if storetype=external. #
Format cmd-line string for get binary. Placeholders:
{filename} {handle} get_args = {filename} {handle}
# Server-side option logfile = FIlE
# Server-side option loglevel = DEBUG
# Server-side option. Used only if indextype=sql. # Sets
mysql wait_timeout option. waittimeout = 300
# Server-side option. Used only if indextype=sql. # Sets
mysql innodb_lock_wait_timeout option. locktimeout = 120
# Server-side option. Used only if indextype=sql. # Name of
the repository reponame = ''
# Client-side option. Used by --list-remote option. List of
remote scratch # patterns to list if no patterns are
specified. defaultremotepatterns = ['*']
# Instructs infinitepush to forward all received bundle2 parts
to the # bundle for storage. Defaults to False. storeallparts
= True
# routes each incoming push to the bundlestore. defaults to
False pushtobundlestore = True
[remotenames] # Client-side option # This option should be set
only if remotenames extension is enabled. # Whether remote
bookmarks are tracked by remotenames extension. bookmarks =
True
journal
track previous positions of bookmarks (EXPERIMENTAL)
This extension adds a new command: hg journal, which shows you
where bookmarks were previously located.
Commands
Change organization
journal
show the previous position of bookmarks and the working copy:
hg journal [OPTION]... [BOOKMARKNAME]
The journal is used to see the previous commits that bookmarks
and the working copy pointed to. By default the previous
locations for the working copy. Passing a bookmark name will
show all the previous positions of that bookmark. Use the --all
switch to show previous locations for all bookmarks and the
working copy; each line will then include the bookmark name, or
'.' for the working copy, as well.
If name starts with re:, the remainder of the name is treated as
a regular expression. To match a name that actually starts with
re:, use the prefix literal:.
By default hg journal only shows the commit hash and the command
that was running at that time. -v/--verbose will show the prior
hash, the user, and the time at which it happened.
Use -c/--commits to output log information on each commit hash;
at this point you can use the usual --patch, --git, --stat and
--template switches to alter the log output for these.
hg journal -T json can be used to produce machine readable
output.
Options:
--all show history for all names
-c, --commits
show commit metadata
-p, --patch
show patch
-g, --git
use git extended diff format
-l,--limit <NUM>
limit number of changes displayed
--stat output diffstat-style summary of changes
--style <STYLE>
display using template map file (DEPRECATED)
-T,--template <TEMPLATE>
display with template
keyword
expand keywords in tracked files
This extension expands RCS/CVS-like or self-customized $Keywords$
in tracked text files selected by your configuration.
Keywords are only expanded in local repositories and not stored
in the change history. The mechanism can be regarded as a
convenience for the current user or for archive distribution.
Keywords expand to the changeset data pertaining to the latest
change relative to the working directory parent of each file.
Configuration is done in the [keyword], [keywordset] and
[keywordmaps] sections of hgrc files.
Example:
[keyword]
# expand keywords in every python file except those matching "x*"
**.py =
x* = ignore
[keywordset]
# prefer svn- over cvs-like default keywordmaps
svn = True
Note The more specific you are in your filename patterns the
less you lose speed in huge repositories.
For [keywordmaps] template mapping and expansion demonstration
and control run hg kwdemo. See hg help templates for a list of
available templates and filters.
Three additional date template filters are provided:
utcdate
"2006/09/18 15:13:13"
svnutcdate
"2006-09-18 15:13:13Z"
svnisodate
"2006-09-18 08:13:13 -700 (Mon, 18 Sep 2006)"
The default template mappings (view with hg kwdemo -d) can be
replaced with customized keywords and templates. Again, run hg
kwdemo to control the results of your configuration changes.
Before changing/disabling active keywords, you must run hg
kwshrink to avoid storing expanded keywords in the change
history.
To force expansion after enabling it, or a configuration change,
run hg kwexpand.
Expansions spanning more than one line and incremental
expansions, like CVS' $Log$, are not supported. A keyword
template map "Log = {desc}" expands to the first line of the
changeset description.
Commands
Uncategorized commands
kwdemo
print [keywordmaps] configuration and an expansion example:
hg kwdemo [-d] [-f RCFILE] [TEMPLATEMAP]...
Show current, custom, or default keyword template maps and their
expansions.
Extend the current configuration by specifying maps as arguments
and using -f/--rcfile to source an external hgrc file.
Use -d/--default to disable current configuration.
See hg help templates for information on templates and filters.
Options:
-d, --default
show default keyword template maps
-f,--rcfile <FILE>
read maps from rcfile
kwexpand
expand keywords in the working directory:
hg kwexpand [OPTION]... [FILE]...
Run after (re)enabling keyword expansion.
kwexpand refuses to run if given files contain local changes.
Options:
-I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
include names matching the given patterns
-X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
exclude names matching the given patterns
[+] marked option can be specified multiple times
kwfiles
show files configured for keyword expansion:
hg kwfiles [OPTION]... [FILE]...
List which files in the working directory are matched by the
[keyword] configuration patterns.
Useful to prevent inadvertent keyword expansion and to speed up
execution by including only files that are actual candidates for
expansion.
See hg help keyword on how to construct patterns both for
inclusion and exclusion of files.
With -A/--all and -v/--verbose the codes used to show the status
of files are:
K = keyword expansion candidate
k = keyword expansion candidate (not tracked)
I = ignored
i = ignored (not tracked)
Options:
-A, --all
show keyword status flags of all files
-i, --ignore
show files excluded from expansion
-u, --unknown
only show unknown (not tracked) files
-I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
include names matching the given patterns
-X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
exclude names matching the given patterns
[+] marked option can be specified multiple times
kwshrink
revert expanded keywords in the working directory:
hg kwshrink [OPTION]... [FILE]...
Must be run before changing/disabling active keywords.
kwshrink refuses to run if given files contain local changes.
Options:
-I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
include names matching the given patterns
-X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
exclude names matching the given patterns
[+] marked option can be specified multiple times
largefiles
track large binary files
Large binary files tend to be not very compressible, not very
diffable, and not at all mergeable. Such files are not handled
efficiently by Mercurial's storage format (revlog), which is
based on compressed binary deltas; storing large binary files as
regular Mercurial files wastes bandwidth and disk space and
increases Mercurial's memory usage. The largefiles extension
addresses these problems by adding a centralized client-server
layer on top of Mercurial: largefiles live in a central store out
on the network somewhere, and you only fetch the revisions that
you need when you need them.
largefiles works by maintaining a "standin file" in .hglf/ for
each largefile. The standins are small (41 bytes: an SHA-1 hash
plus newline) and are tracked by Mercurial. Largefile revisions
are identified by the SHA-1 hash of their contents, which is
written to the standin. largefiles uses that revision ID to
get/put largefile revisions from/to the central store. This saves
both disk space and bandwidth, since you don't need to retrieve
all historical revisions of large files when you clone or pull.
To start a new repository or add new large binary files, just add
--large to your hg add command. For example:
$ dd if=/dev/urandom of=randomdata count=2000
$ hg add --large randomdata
$ hg commit -m "add randomdata as a largefile"
When you push a changeset that adds/modifies largefiles to a
remote repository, its largefile revisions will be uploaded along
with it. Note that the remote Mercurial must also have the
largefiles extension enabled for this to work.
When you pull a changeset that affects largefiles from a remote
repository, the largefiles for the changeset will by default not
be pulled down. However, when you update to such a revision, any
largefiles needed by that revision are downloaded and cached (if
they have never been downloaded before). One way to pull
largefiles when pulling is thus to use --update, which will
update your working copy to the latest pulled revision (and
thereby downloading any new largefiles).
If you want to pull largefiles you don't need for update yet,
then you can use pull with the --lfrev option or the hg lfpull
command.
If you know you are pulling from a non-default location and want
to download all the largefiles that correspond to the new
changesets at the same time, then you can pull with --lfrev
"pulled()".
If you just want to ensure that you will have the largefiles
needed to merge or rebase with new heads that you are pulling,
then you can pull with --lfrev "head(pulled())" flag to
pre-emptively download any largefiles that are new in the heads
you are pulling.
Keep in mind that network access may now be required to update to
changesets that you have not previously updated to. The nature of
the largefiles extension means that updating is no longer
guaranteed to be a local-only operation.
If you already have large files tracked by Mercurial without the
largefiles extension, you will need to convert your repository in
order to benefit from largefiles. This is done with the hg
lfconvert command:
$ hg lfconvert --size 10 oldrepo newrepo
In repositories that already have largefiles in them, any new
file over 10MB will automatically be added as a largefile. To
change this threshold, set largefiles.minsize in your Mercurial
config file to the minimum size in megabytes to track as a
largefile, or use the --lfsize option to the add command (also in
megabytes):
[largefiles]
minsize = 2
$ hg add --lfsize 2
The largefiles.patterns config option allows you to specify a
list of filename patterns (see hg help patterns) that should
always be tracked as largefiles:
[largefiles]
patterns =
*.jpg
re:.*\.(png|bmp)$
library.zip
content/audio/*
Files that match one of these patterns will be added as
largefiles regardless of their size.
The largefiles.minsize and largefiles.patterns config options
will be ignored for any repositories not already containing a
largefile. To add the first largefile to a repository, you must
explicitly do so with the --large flag passed to the hg add
command.
Commands
Uncategorized commands
lfconvert
convert a normal repository to a largefiles repository:
hg lfconvert SOURCE DEST [FILE ...]
Convert repository SOURCE to a new repository DEST, identical to
SOURCE except that certain files will be converted as largefiles:
specifically, any file that matches any PATTERN or whose size is
above the minimum size threshold is converted as a largefile. The
size used to determine whether or not to track a file as a
largefile is the size of the first version of the file. The
minimum size can be specified either with --size or in
configuration as largefiles.size.
After running this command you will need to make sure that
largefiles is enabled anywhere you intend to push the new
repository.
Use --to-normal to convert largefiles back to normal files; after
this, the DEST repository can be used without largefiles at all.
Options:
-s,--size <SIZE>
minimum size (MB) for files to be converted as largefiles
--to-normal
convert from a largefiles repo to a normal repo
lfpull
pull largefiles for the specified revisions from the specified
source:
hg lfpull -r REV... [-e CMD] [--remotecmd CMD] [SOURCE]
Pull largefiles that are referenced from local changesets but
missing locally, pulling from a remote repository to the local
cache.
If SOURCE is omitted, the 'default' path will be used. See hg
help urls for more information.
Some examples:
• pull largefiles for all branch heads:
hg lfpull -r "head() and not closed()"
• pull largefiles on the default branch:
hg lfpull -r "branch(default)"
Options:
-r,--rev <VALUE[+]>
pull largefiles for these revisions
-e,--ssh <CMD>
specify ssh command to use
--remotecmd <CMD>
specify hg command to run on the remote side
--insecure
do not verify server certificate (ignoring web.cacerts
config)
[+] marked option can be specified multiple times
lfs
lfs - large file support (EXPERIMENTAL)
This extension allows large files to be tracked outside of the
normal repository storage and stored on a centralized server,
similar to the largefiles extension. The git-lfs protocol is
used when communicating with the server, so existing git
infrastructure can be harnessed. Even though the files are
stored outside of the repository, they are still integrity
checked in the same manner as normal files.
The files stored outside of the repository are downloaded on
demand, which reduces the time to clone, and possibly the local
disk usage. This changes fundamental workflows in a DVCS, so
careful thought should be given before deploying it. hg convert
can be used to convert LFS repositories to normal repositories
that no longer require this extension, and do so without changing
the commit hashes. This allows the extension to be disabled if
the centralized workflow becomes burdensome. However, the pre
and post convert clones will not be able to communicate with each
other unless the extension is enabled on both.
To start a new repository, or to add LFS files to an existing
one, just create an .hglfs file as described below in the root
directory of the repository. Typically, this file should be put
under version control, so that the settings will propagate to
other repositories with push and pull. During any commit,
Mercurial will consult this file to determine if an added or
modified file should be stored externally. The type of storage
depends on the characteristics of the file at each commit. A
file that is near a size threshold may switch back and forth
between LFS and normal storage, as needed.
Alternately, both normal repositories and largefile controlled
repositories can be converted to LFS by using hg convert and the
lfs.track config option described below. The .hglfs file should
then be created and added, to control subsequent LFS selection.
The hashes are also unchanged in this case. The LFS and non-LFS
repositories can be distinguished because the LFS repository will
abort any command if this extension is disabled.
Committed LFS files are held locally, until the repository is
pushed. Prior to pushing the normal repository data, the LFS
files that are tracked by the outgoing commits are automatically
uploaded to the configured central server. No LFS files are
transferred on hg pull or hg clone. Instead, the files are
downloaded on demand as they need to be read, if a cached copy
cannot be found locally. Both committing and downloading an LFS
file will link the file to a usercache, to speed up future
access. See the usercache config setting described below.
The extension reads its configuration from a versioned .hglfs
configuration file found in the root of the working directory.
The .hglfs file uses the same syntax as all other Mercurial
configuration files. It uses a single section, [track].
The [track] section specifies which files are stored as LFS (or
not). Each line is keyed by a file pattern, with a predicate
value. The first file pattern match is used, so put more
specific patterns first. The available predicates are all(),
none(), and size(). See "hg help filesets.size" for the latter.
Example versioned .hglfs file:
[track]
# No Makefile or python file, anywhere, will be LFS
**Makefile = none()
**.py = none()
**.zip = all()
**.exe = size(">1MB")
# Catchall for everything not matched above
** = size(">10MB")
Configs:
[lfs]
# Remote endpoint. Multiple protocols are supported:
# - http(s)://user:pass@example.com/path
# git-lfs endpoint
# - file:///tmp/path
# local filesystem, usually for testing
# if unset, lfs will assume the remote repository also handles blob storage
# for http(s) URLs. Otherwise, lfs will prompt to set this when it must
# use this value.
# (default: unset)
url = https://example.com/repo.git/info/lfs
# Which files to track in LFS. Path tests are "**.extname" for file
# extensions, and "path:under/some/directory" for path prefix. Both
# are relative to the repository root.
# File size can be tested with the "size()" fileset, and tests can be
# joined with fileset operators. (See "hg help filesets.operators".)
#
# Some examples:
# - all() # everything
# - none() # nothing
# - size(">20MB") # larger than 20MB
# - !**.txt # anything not a *.txt file
# - **.zip | **.tar.gz | **.7z # some types of compressed files
# - path:bin # files under "bin" in the project root
# - (**.php & size(">2MB")) | (**.js & size(">5MB")) | **.tar.gz
# | (path:bin & !path:/bin/README) | size(">1GB")
# (default: none())
#
# This is ignored if there is a tracked '.hglfs' file, and this setting
# will eventually be deprecated and removed.
track = size(">10M")
# how many times to retry before giving up on transferring an object
retry = 5
# the local directory to store lfs files for sharing across local clones.
# If not set, the cache is located in an OS specific cache location.
usercache = /path/to/global/cache
Commands
Uncategorized commands
logtoprocess
send ui.log() data to a subprocess (EXPERIMENTAL)
This extension lets you specify a shell command per ui.log()
event, sending all remaining arguments to as environment
variables to that command.
Positional arguments construct a log message, which is passed in
the MSG1 environment variables. Each keyword argument is set as a
OPT_UPPERCASE_KEY variable (so the key is uppercased, and
prefixed with OPT_). The original event name is passed in the
EVENT environment variable, and the process ID of mercurial is
given in HGPID.
So given a call ui.log('foo', 'bar %s ', 'baz', spam='eggs'), a
script configured for the `foo event can expect an environment
with MSG1=bar baz, and OPT_SPAM=eggs.
Scripts are configured in the [logtoprocess] section, each key an
event name. For example:
[logtoprocess]
commandexception = echo "$MSG1" > /var/log/mercurial_exceptions.log
would log the warning message and traceback of any failed command
dispatch.
Scripts are run asynchronously as detached daemon processes;
mercurial will not ensure that they exit cleanly.
mq
manage a stack of patches
This extension lets you work with a stack of patches in a
Mercurial repository. It manages two stacks of patches - all
known patches, and applied patches (subset of known patches).
Known patches are represented as patch files in the .hg/patches
directory. Applied patches are both patch files and changesets.
Common tasks (use hg help COMMAND for more details):
create new patch qnew
import existing patch qimport
print patch series qseries
print applied patches qapplied
add known patch to applied stack qpush
remove patch from applied stack qpop
refresh contents of top applied patch qrefresh
By default, mq will automatically use git patches when required
to avoid losing file mode changes, copy records, binary files or
empty files creations or deletions. This behavior can be
configured with:
[mq]
git = auto/keep/yes/no
If set to 'keep', mq will obey the [diff] section configuration
while preserving existing git patches upon qrefresh. If set to
'yes' or 'no', mq will override the [diff] section and always
generate git or regular patches, possibly losing data in the
second case.
It may be desirable for mq changesets to be kept in the secret
phase (see hg help phases), which can be enabled with the
following setting:
[mq]
secret = True
You will by default be managing a patch queue named "patches".
You can create other, independent patch queues with the hg qqueue
command.
If the working directory contains uncommitted files, qpush, qpop
and qgoto abort immediately. If -f/--force is used, the changes
are discarded. Setting:
[mq]
keepchanges = True
make them behave as if --keep-changes were passed, and
non-conflicting local changes will be tolerated and preserved. If
incompatible options such as -f/--force or --exact are passed,
this setting is ignored.
This extension used to provide a strip command. This command now
lives in the strip extension.
Commands
Repository creation
qclone
clone main and patch repository at same time:
hg qclone [OPTION]... SOURCE [DEST]
If source is local, destination will have no patches applied. If
source is remote, this command can not check if patches are
applied in source, so cannot guarantee that patches are not
applied in destination. If you clone remote repository, be sure
before that it has no patches applied.
Source patch repository is looked for in <src>/.hg/patches by
default. Use -p <url> to change.
The patch directory must be a nested Mercurial repository, as
would be created by hg init --mq.
Return 0 on success.
Options:
--pull use pull protocol to copy metadata
-U, --noupdate
do not update the new working directories
--uncompressed
use uncompressed transfer (fast over LAN)
-p,--patches <REPO>
location of source patch repository
-e,--ssh <CMD>
specify ssh command to use
--remotecmd <CMD>
specify hg command to run on the remote side
--insecure
do not verify server certificate (ignoring web.cacerts
config)
qinit
init a new queue repository (DEPRECATED):
hg qinit [-c]
The queue repository is unversioned by default. If
-c/--create-repo is specified, qinit will create a separate
nested repository for patches (qinit -c may also be run later to
convert an unversioned patch repository into a versioned one).
You can use qcommit to commit changes to this queue repository.
This command is deprecated. Without -c, it's implied by other
relevant commands. With -c, use hg init --mq instead.
Options:
-c, --create-repo
create queue repository
Change creation
qcommit
commit changes in the queue repository (DEPRECATED):
hg qcommit [OPTION]... [FILE]...
This command is deprecated; use hg commit --mq instead.
Options:
-A, --addremove
mark new/missing files as added/removed before committing
--close-branch
mark a branch head as closed
--amend
amend the parent of the working directory
-s, --secret
use the secret phase for committing
-e, --edit
invoke editor on commit messages
--force-close-branch
forcibly close branch from a non-head changeset (ADVANCED)
-i, --interactive
use interactive mode
-I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
include names matching the given patterns
-X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
exclude names matching the given patterns
-m,--message <TEXT>
use text as commit message
-l,--logfile <FILE>
read commit message from file
-d,--date <DATE>
record the specified date as commit date
-u,--user <USER>
record the specified user as committer
-S, --subrepos
recurse into subrepositories
[+] marked option can be specified multiple times
aliases: qci
qnew
create a new patch:
hg qnew [-e] [-m TEXT] [-l FILE] PATCH [FILE]...
qnew creates a new patch on top of the currently-applied patch
(if any). The patch will be initialized with any outstanding
changes in the working directory. You may also use -I/--include,
-X/--exclude, and/or a list of files after the patch name to add
only changes to matching files to the new patch, leaving the rest
as uncommitted modifications.
-u/--user and -d/--date can be used to set the (given) user and
date, respectively. -U/--currentuser and -D/--currentdate set
user to current user and date to current date.
-e/--edit, -m/--message or -l/--logfile set the patch header as
well as the commit message. If none is specified, the header is
empty and the commit message is '[mq]: PATCH'.
Use the -g/--git option to keep the patch in the git extended
diff format. Read the diffs help topic for more information on
why this is important for preserving permission changes and
copy/rename information.
Returns 0 on successful creation of a new patch.
Options:
-e, --edit
invoke editor on commit messages
-f, --force
import uncommitted changes (DEPRECATED)
-g, --git
use git extended diff format
-U, --currentuser
add "From: <current user>" to patch
-u,--user <USER>
add "From: <USER>" to patch
-D, --currentdate
add "Date: <current date>" to patch
-d,--date <DATE>
add "Date: <DATE>" to patch
-I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
include names matching the given patterns
-X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
exclude names matching the given patterns
-m,--message <TEXT>
use text as commit message
-l,--logfile <FILE>
read commit message from file
[+] marked option can be specified multiple times
qrefresh
update the current patch:
hg qrefresh [-I] [-X] [-e] [-m TEXT] [-l FILE] [-s] [FILE]...
If any file patterns are provided, the refreshed patch will
contain only the modifications that match those patterns; the
remaining modifications will remain in the working directory.
If -s/--short is specified, files currently included in the patch
will be refreshed just like matched files and remain in the
patch.
If -e/--edit is specified, Mercurial will start your configured
editor for you to enter a message. In case qrefresh fails, you
will find a backup of your message in .hg/last-message.txt.
hg add/remove/copy/rename work as usual, though you might want to
use git-style patches (-g/--git or [diff] git=1) to track copies
and renames. See the diffs help topic for more information on the
git diff format.
Returns 0 on success.
Options:
-e, --edit
invoke editor on commit messages
-g, --git
use git extended diff format
-s, --short
refresh only files already in the patch and specified
files
-U, --currentuser
add/update author field in patch with current user
-u,--user <USER>
add/update author field in patch with given user
-D, --currentdate
add/update date field in patch with current date
-d,--date <DATE>
add/update date field in patch with given date
-I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
include names matching the given patterns
-X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
exclude names matching the given patterns
-m,--message <TEXT>
use text as commit message
-l,--logfile <FILE>
read commit message from file
[+] marked option can be specified multiple times
Change manipulation
qfold
fold the named patches into the current patch:
hg qfold [-e] [-k] [-m TEXT] [-l FILE] PATCH...
Patches must not yet be applied. Each patch will be successively
applied to the current patch in the order given. If all the
patches apply successfully, the current patch will be refreshed
with the new cumulative patch, and the folded patches will be
deleted. With -k/--keep, the folded patch files will not be
removed afterwards.
The header for each folded patch will be concatenated with the
current patch header, separated by a line of * * *.
Returns 0 on success.
Options:
-e, --edit
invoke editor on commit messages
-k, --keep
keep folded patch files
-m,--message <TEXT>
use text as commit message
-l,--logfile <FILE>
read commit message from file
Change organization
qapplied
print the patches already applied:
hg qapplied [-1] [-s] [PATCH]
Returns 0 on success.
Options:
-1, --last
show only the preceding applied patch
-s, --summary
print first line of patch header
qdelete
remove patches from queue:
hg qdelete [-k] [PATCH]...
The patches must not be applied, and at least one patch is
required. Exact patch identifiers must be given. With -k/--keep,
the patch files are preserved in the patch directory.
To stop managing a patch and move it into permanent history, use
the hg qfinish command.
Options:
-k, --keep
keep patch file
-r,--rev <REV[+]>
stop managing a revision (DEPRECATED)
[+] marked option can be specified multiple times
aliases: qremove qrm
qfinish
move applied patches into repository history:
hg qfinish [-a] [REV]...
Finishes the specified revisions (corresponding to applied
patches) by moving them out of mq control into regular repository
history.
Accepts a revision range or the -a/--applied option. If --applied
is specified, all applied mq revisions are removed from mq
control. Otherwise, the given revisions must be at the base of
the stack of applied patches.
This can be especially useful if your changes have been applied
to an upstream repository, or if you are about to push your
changes to upstream.
Returns 0 on success.
Options:
-a, --applied
finish all applied changesets
qgoto
push or pop patches until named patch is at top of stack:
hg qgoto [OPTION]... PATCH
Returns 0 on success.
Options:
--keep-changes
tolerate non-conflicting local changes
-f, --force
overwrite any local changes
--no-backup
do not save backup copies of files
qguard
set or print guards for a patch:
hg qguard [-l] [-n] [PATCH] [-- [+GUARD]... [-GUARD]...]
Guards control whether a patch can be pushed. A patch with no
guards is always pushed. A patch with a positive guard ("+foo")
is pushed only if the hg qselect command has activated it. A
patch with a negative guard ("-foo") is never pushed if the hg
qselect command has activated it.
With no arguments, print the currently active guards. With
arguments, set guards for the named patch.
Note Specifying negative guards now requires '--'.
To set guards on another patch:
hg qguard other.patch -- +2.6.17 -stable
Returns 0 on success.
Options:
-l, --list
list all patches and guards
-n, --none
drop all guards
qheader
print the header of the topmost or specified patch:
hg qheader [PATCH]
Returns 0 on success.
qnext
print the name of the next pushable patch:
hg qnext [-s]
Returns 0 on success.
Options:
-s, --summary
print first line of patch header
qpop
pop the current patch off the stack:
hg qpop [-a] [-f] [PATCH | INDEX]
Without argument, pops off the top of the patch stack. If given a
patch name, keeps popping off patches until the named patch is at
the top of the stack.
By default, abort if the working directory contains uncommitted
changes. With --keep-changes, abort only if the uncommitted files
overlap with patched files. With -f/--force, backup and discard
changes made to such files.
Return 0 on success.
Options:
-a, --all
pop all patches
-n,--name <NAME>
queue name to pop (DEPRECATED)
--keep-changes
tolerate non-conflicting local changes
-f, --force
forget any local changes to patched files
--no-backup
do not save backup copies of files
qprev
print the name of the preceding applied patch:
hg qprev [-s]
Returns 0 on success.
Options:
-s, --summary
print first line of patch header
qpush
push the next patch onto the stack:
hg qpush [-f] [-l] [-a] [--move] [PATCH | INDEX]
By default, abort if the working directory contains uncommitted
changes. With --keep-changes, abort only if the uncommitted files
overlap with patched files. With -f/--force, backup and patch
over uncommitted changes.
Return 0 on success.
Options:
--keep-changes
tolerate non-conflicting local changes
-f, --force
apply on top of local changes
-e, --exact
apply the target patch to its recorded parent
-l, --list
list patch name in commit text
-a, --all
apply all patches
-m, --merge
merge from another queue (DEPRECATED)
-n,--name <NAME>
merge queue name (DEPRECATED)
--move reorder patch series and apply only the patch
--no-backup
do not save backup copies of files
qqueue
manage multiple patch queues:
hg qqueue [OPTION] [QUEUE]
Supports switching between different patch queues, as well as
creating new patch queues and deleting existing ones.
Omitting a queue name or specifying -l/--list will show you the
registered queues - by default the "normal" patches queue is
registered. The currently active queue will be marked with
"(active)". Specifying --active will print only the name of the
active queue.
To create a new queue, use -c/--create. The queue is
automatically made active, except in the case where there are
applied patches from the currently active queue in the
repository. Then the queue will only be created and switching
will fail.
To delete an existing queue, use --delete. You cannot delete the
currently active queue.
Returns 0 on success.
Options:
-l, --list
list all available queues
--active
print name of active queue
-c, --create
create new queue
--rename
rename active queue
--delete
delete reference to queue
--purge
delete queue, and remove patch dir
qrename
rename a patch:
hg qrename PATCH1 [PATCH2]
With one argument, renames the current patch to PATCH1. With two
arguments, renames PATCH1 to PATCH2.
Returns 0 on success.
aliases: qmv
qrestore
restore the queue state saved by a revision (DEPRECATED):
hg qrestore [-d] [-u] REV
This command is deprecated, use hg rebase instead.
Options:
-d, --delete
delete save entry
-u, --update
update queue working directory
qsave
save current queue state (DEPRECATED):
hg qsave [-m TEXT] [-l FILE] [-c] [-n NAME] [-e] [-f]
This command is deprecated, use hg rebase instead.
Options:
-c, --copy
copy patch directory
-n,--name <NAME>
copy directory name
-e, --empty
clear queue status file
-f, --force
force copy
-m,--message <TEXT>
use text as commit message
-l,--logfile <FILE>
read commit message from file
qselect
set or print guarded patches to push:
hg qselect [OPTION]... [GUARD]...
Use the hg qguard command to set or print guards on patch, then
use qselect to tell mq which guards to use. A patch will be
pushed if it has no guards or any positive guards match the
currently selected guard, but will not be pushed if any negative
guards match the current guard. For example:
qguard foo.patch -- -stable (negative guard)
qguard bar.patch +stable (positive guard)
qselect stable
This activates the "stable" guard. mq will skip foo.patch
(because it has a negative match) but push bar.patch (because it
has a positive match).
With no arguments, prints the currently active guards. With one
argument, sets the active guard.
Use -n/--none to deactivate guards (no other arguments needed).
When no guards are active, patches with positive guards are
skipped and patches with negative guards are pushed.
qselect can change the guards on applied patches. It does not pop
guarded patches by default. Use --pop to pop back to the last
applied patch that is not guarded. Use --reapply (which implies
--pop) to push back to the current patch afterwards, but skip
guarded patches.
Use -s/--series to print a list of all guards in the series file
(no other arguments needed). Use -v for more information.
Returns 0 on success.
Options:
-n, --none
disable all guards
-s, --series
list all guards in series file
--pop pop to before first guarded applied patch
--reapply
pop, then reapply patches
qseries
print the entire series file:
hg qseries [-ms]
Returns 0 on success.
Options:
-m, --missing
print patches not in series
-s, --summary
print first line of patch header
qtop
print the name of the current patch:
hg qtop [-s]
Returns 0 on success.
Options:
-s, --summary
print first line of patch header
qunapplied
print the patches not yet applied:
hg qunapplied [-1] [-s] [PATCH]
Returns 0 on success.
Options:
-1, --first
show only the first patch
-s, --summary
print first line of patch header
File content management
qdiff
diff of the current patch and subsequent modifications:
hg qdiff [OPTION]... [FILE]...
Shows a diff which includes the current patch as well as any
changes which have been made in the working directory since the
last refresh (thus showing what the current patch would become
after a qrefresh).
Use hg diff if you only want to see the changes made since the
last qrefresh, or hg export qtip if you want to see changes made
by the current patch without including changes made since the
qrefresh.
Returns 0 on success.
Options:
-a, --text
treat all files as text
-g, --git
use git extended diff format (DEFAULT: diff.git)
--binary
generate binary diffs in git mode (default)
--nodates
omit dates from diff headers
--noprefix
omit a/ and b/ prefixes from filenames
-p, --show-function
show which function each change is in (DEFAULT:
diff.showfunc)
--reverse
produce a diff that undoes the changes
-w, --ignore-all-space
ignore white space when comparing lines
-b, --ignore-space-change
ignore changes in the amount of white space
-B, --ignore-blank-lines
ignore changes whose lines are all blank
-Z, --ignore-space-at-eol
ignore changes in whitespace at EOL
-U,--unified <NUM>
number of lines of context to show
--stat output diffstat-style summary of changes
--root <DIR>
produce diffs relative to subdirectory
-I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
include names matching the given patterns
-X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
exclude names matching the given patterns
[+] marked option can be specified multiple times
Change import/export
qimport
import a patch or existing changeset:
hg qimport [-e] [-n NAME] [-f] [-g] [-P] [-r REV]... [FILE]...
The patch is inserted into the series after the last applied
patch. If no patches have been applied, qimport prepends the
patch to the series.
The patch will have the same name as its source file unless you
give it a new one with -n/--name.
You can register an existing patch inside the patch directory
with the -e/--existing flag.
With -f/--force, an existing patch of the same name will be
overwritten.
An existing changeset may be placed under mq control with
-r/--rev (e.g. qimport --rev . -n patch will place the current
revision under mq control). With -g/--git, patches imported with
--rev will use the git diff format. See the diffs help topic for
information on why this is important for preserving rename/copy
information and permission changes. Use hg qfinish to remove
changesets from mq control.
To import a patch from standard input, pass - as the patch file.
When importing from standard input, a patch name must be
specified using the --name flag.
To import an existing patch while renaming it:
hg qimport -e existing-patch -n new-name
Returns 0 if import succeeded.
Options:
-e, --existing
import file in patch directory
-n,--name <NAME>
name of patch file
-f, --force
overwrite existing files
-r,--rev <REV[+]>
place existing revisions under mq control
-g, --git
use git extended diff format
-P, --push
qpush after importing
[+] marked option can be specified multiple times
narrow
create clones which fetch history data for subset of files
(EXPERIMENTAL)
Commands
Repository maintenance
tracked
show or change the current narrowspec:
hg tracked [OPTIONS]... [REMOTE]
With no argument, shows the current narrowspec entries, one per
line. Each line will be prefixed with 'I' or 'X' for included or
excluded patterns, respectively.
The narrowspec is comprised of expressions to match remote files
and/or directories that should be pulled into your client. The
narrowspec has include and exclude expressions, with excludes
always trumping includes: that is, if a file matches an exclude
expression, it will be excluded even if it also matches an
include expression. Excluding files that were never included has
no effect.
Each included or excluded entry is in the format described by 'hg
help patterns'.
The options allow you to add or remove included and excluded
expressions.
If --clear is specified, then all previous includes and excludes
are DROPPED and replaced by the new ones specified to
--addinclude and --addexclude. If --clear is specified without
any further options, the narrowspec will be empty and will not
match any files.
If --auto-remove-includes is specified, then those includes that
don't match any files modified by currently visible local commits
(those not shared by the remote) will be added to the set of
explicitly specified includes to remove.
--import-rules accepts a path to a file containing rules,
allowing you to add --addinclude, --addexclude rules in bulk.
Like the other include and exclude switches, the changes are
applied immediately.
Options:
--addinclude <VALUE[+]>
new paths to include
--removeinclude <VALUE[+]>
old paths to no longer include
--auto-remove-includes
automatically choose unused includes to remove
--addexclude <VALUE[+]>
new paths to exclude
--import-rules <VALUE>
import narrowspecs from a file
--removeexclude <VALUE[+]>
old paths to no longer exclude
--clear
whether to replace the existing narrowspec
--force-delete-local-changes
forces deletion of local changes when narrowing
--backup
back up local changes when narrowing (default: True)
--update-working-copy
update working copy when the store has changed
-e,--ssh <CMD>
specify ssh command to use
--remotecmd <CMD>
specify hg command to run on the remote side
--insecure
do not verify server certificate (ignoring web.cacerts
config)
[+] marked option can be specified multiple times
notify
hooks for sending email push notifications
This extension implements hooks to send email notifications when
changesets are sent from or received by the local repository.
First, enable the extension as explained in hg help extensions,
and register the hook you want to run. incoming and changegroup
hooks are run when changesets are received, while outgoing hooks
are for changesets sent to another repository:
[hooks]
# one email for each incoming changeset
incoming.notify = python:hgext.notify.hook
# one email for all incoming changesets
changegroup.notify = python:hgext.notify.hook
# one email for all outgoing changesets
outgoing.notify = python:hgext.notify.hook
This registers the hooks. To enable notification, subscribers
must be assigned to repositories. The [usersubs] section maps
multiple repositories to a given recipient. The [reposubs]
section maps multiple recipients to a single repository:
[usersubs]
# key is subscriber email, value is a comma-separated list of repo patterns
user@host = pattern
[reposubs]
# key is repo pattern, value is a comma-separated list of subscriber emails
pattern = user@host
A pattern is a glob matching the absolute path to a repository,
optionally combined with a revset expression. A revset
expression, if present, is separated from the glob by a hash.
Example:
[reposubs]
*/widgets#branch(release) = qa-team@example.com
This sends to qa-team@example.com whenever a changeset on the
release branch triggers a notification in any repository ending
in widgets.
In order to place them under direct user management, [usersubs]
and [reposubs] sections may be placed in a separate hgrc file and
incorporated by reference:
[notify]
config = /path/to/subscriptionsfile
Notifications will not be sent until the notify.test value is set
to False; see below.
Notifications content can be tweaked with the following
configuration entries:
notify.test
If True, print messages to stdout instead of sending them.
Default: True.
notify.sources
Space-separated list of change sources. Notifications are
activated only when a changeset's source is in this list.
Sources may be:
serve
changesets received via http or ssh
pull
changesets received via hg pull
unbundle
changesets received via hg unbundle
push
changesets sent or received via hg push
bundle
changesets sent via hg unbundle
Default: serve.
notify.strip
Number of leading slashes to strip from url paths. By
default, notifications reference repositories with their
absolute path. notify.strip lets you turn them into
relative paths. For example, notify.strip=3 will change
/long/path/repository into repository. Default: 0.
notify.domain
Default email domain for sender or recipients with no
explicit domain. It is also used for the domain part of
the Message-Id when using notify.messageidseed.
notify.messageidseed
Create deterministic Message-Id headers for the mails
based on the seed and the revision identifier of the first
commit in the changeset.
notify.style
Style file to use when formatting emails.
notify.template
Template to use when formatting emails.
notify.incoming
Template to use when run as an incoming hook, overriding
notify.template.
notify.outgoing
Template to use when run as an outgoing hook, overriding
notify.template.
notify.changegroup
Template to use when running as a changegroup hook,
overriding notify.template.
notify.maxdiff
Maximum number of diff lines to include in notification
email. Set to 0 to disable the diff, or -1 to include all
of it. Default: 300.
notify.maxdiffstat
Maximum number of diffstat lines to include in
notification email. Set to -1 to include all of it.
Default: -1.
notify.maxsubject
Maximum number of characters in email's subject line.
Default: 67.
notify.diffstat
Set to True to include a diffstat before diff content.
Default: True.
notify.showfunc
If set, override diff.showfunc for the diff content.
Default: None.
notify.merge
If True, send notifications for merge changesets. Default:
True.
notify.mbox
If set, append mails to this mbox file instead of sending.
Default: None.
notify.fromauthor
If set, use the committer of the first changeset in a
changegroup for the "From" field of the notification mail.
If not set, take the user from the pushing repo. Default:
False.
notify.reply-to-predecessor (EXPERIMENTAL)
If set and the changeset has a predecessor in the
repository, try to thread the notification mail with the
predecessor. This adds the "In-Reply-To" header to the
notification mail with a reference to the predecessor with
the smallest revision number. Mail threads can still be
torn, especially when changesets are folded.
This option must be used in combination with
notify.messageidseed.
If set, the following entries will also be used to customize the
notifications:
email.from
Email From address to use if none can be found in the
generated email content.
web.baseurl
Root repository URL to combine with repository paths when
making references. See also notify.strip.
pager
browse command output with an external pager (DEPRECATED)
Forcibly enable paging for individual commands that don't
typically request pagination with the attend-<command> option.
This setting takes precedence over ignore options and defaults:
[pager]
attend-cat = false
patchbomb
command to send changesets as (a series of) patch emails
The series is started off with a "[PATCH 0 of N]" introduction,
which describes the series as a whole.
Each patch email has a Subject line of "[PATCH M of N] ...",
using the first line of the changeset description as the subject
text. The message contains two or three body parts:
• The changeset description.
• [Optional] The result of running diffstat on the patch.
• The patch itself, as generated by hg export.
Each message refers to the first in the series using the
In-Reply-To and References headers, so they will show up as a
sequence in threaded mail and news readers, and in mail archives.
To configure other defaults, add a section like this to your
configuration file:
[email]
from = My Name <my@email>
to = recipient1, recipient2, ...
cc = cc1, cc2, ...
bcc = bcc1, bcc2, ...
reply-to = address1, address2, ...
Use [patchbomb] as configuration section name if you need to
override global [email] address settings.
Then you can use the hg email command to mail a series of
changesets as a patchbomb.
You can also either configure the method option in the email
section to be a sendmail compatible mailer or fill out the [smtp]
section so that the patchbomb extension can automatically send
patchbombs directly from the commandline. See the [email] and
[smtp] sections in hgrc(5) for details.
By default, hg email will prompt for a To or CC header if you do
not supply one via configuration or the command line. You can
override this to never prompt by configuring an empty value:
[email]
cc =
You can control the default inclusion of an introduction message
with the patchbomb.intro configuration option. The configuration
is always overwritten by command line flags like --intro and
--desc:
[patchbomb]
intro=auto # include introduction message if more than 1 patch (default)
intro=never # never include an introduction message
intro=always # always include an introduction message
You can specify a template for flags to be added in subject
prefixes. Flags specified by --flag option are exported as
{flags} keyword:
[patchbomb]
flagtemplate = "{separate(' ',
ifeq(branch, 'default', '', branch|upper),
flags)}"
You can set patchbomb to always ask for confirmation by setting
patchbomb.confirm to true.
Commands
Change import/export
email
send changesets by email:
hg email [OPTION]... [DEST]...
By default, diffs are sent in the format generated by hg export,
one per message. The series starts with a "[PATCH 0 of N]"
introduction, which describes the series as a whole.
Each patch email has a Subject line of "[PATCH M of N] ...",
using the first line of the changeset description as the subject
text. The message contains two or three parts. First, the
changeset description.
With the -d/--diffstat option, if the diffstat program is
installed, the result of running diffstat on the patch is
inserted.
Finally, the patch itself, as generated by hg export.
With the -d/--diffstat or --confirm options, you will be
presented with a final summary of all messages and asked for
confirmation before the messages are sent.
By default the patch is included as text in the email body for
easy reviewing. Using the -a/--attach option will instead create
an attachment for the patch. With -i/--inline an inline
attachment will be created. You can include a patch both as text
in the email body and as a regular or an inline attachment by
combining the -a/--attach or -i/--inline with the --body option.
With -B/--bookmark changesets reachable by the given bookmark are
selected.
With -o/--outgoing, emails will be generated for patches not
found in the destination repository (or only those which are
ancestors of the specified revisions if any are provided)
With -b/--bundle, changesets are selected as for --outgoing, but
a single email containing a binary Mercurial bundle as an
attachment will be sent. Use the patchbomb.bundletype config
option to control the bundle type as with hg bundle --type.
With -m/--mbox, instead of previewing each patchbomb message in a
pager or sending the messages directly, it will create a UNIX
mailbox file with the patch emails. This mailbox file can be
previewed with any mail user agent which supports UNIX mbox
files.
With -n/--test, all steps will run, but mail will not be sent.
You will be prompted for an email recipient address, a subject
and an introductory message describing the patches of your
patchbomb. Then when all is done, patchbomb messages are
displayed.
In case email sending fails, you will find a backup of your
series introductory message in .hg/last-email.txt.
The default behavior of this command can be customized through
configuration. (See hg help patchbomb for details)
Examples:
hg email -r 3000 # send patch 3000 only
hg email -r 3000 -r 3001 # send patches 3000 and 3001
hg email -r 3000:3005 # send patches 3000 through 3005
hg email 3000 # send patch 3000 (deprecated)
hg email -o # send all patches not in default
hg email -o DEST # send all patches not in DEST
hg email -o -r 3000 # send all ancestors of 3000 not in default
hg email -o -r 3000 DEST # send all ancestors of 3000 not in DEST
hg email -B feature # send all ancestors of feature bookmark
hg email -b # send bundle of all patches not in default
hg email -b DEST # send bundle of all patches not in DEST
hg email -b -r 3000 # bundle of all ancestors of 3000 not in default
hg email -b -r 3000 DEST # bundle of all ancestors of 3000 not in DEST
hg email -o -m mbox && # generate an mbox file...
mutt -R -f mbox # ... and view it with mutt
hg email -o -m mbox && # generate an mbox file ...
formail -s sendmail \ # ... and use formail to send from the mbox
-bm -t < mbox # ... using sendmail
Before using this command, you will need to enable email in your
hgrc. See the [email] section in hgrc(5) for details.
Options:
-g, --git
use git extended diff format
--plain
omit hg patch header
-o, --outgoing
send changes not found in the target repository
-b, --bundle
send changes not in target as a binary bundle
-B,--bookmark <BOOKMARK>
send changes only reachable by given bookmark
--bundlename <NAME>
name of the bundle attachment file (default: bundle)
-r,--rev <REV[+]>
a revision to send
--force
run even when remote repository is unrelated (with
-b/--bundle)
--base <REV[+]>
a base changeset to specify instead of a destination (with
-b/--bundle)
--intro
send an introduction email for a single patch
--body send patches as inline message text (default)
-a, --attach
send patches as attachments
-i, --inline
send patches as inline attachments
--bcc <EMAIL[+]>
email addresses of blind carbon copy recipients
-c,--cc <EMAIL[+]>
email addresses of copy recipients
--confirm
ask for confirmation before sending
-d, --diffstat
add diffstat output to messages
--date <DATE>
use the given date as the sending date
--desc <FILE>
use the given file as the series description
-f,--from <EMAIL>
email address of sender
-n, --test
print messages that would be sent
-m,--mbox <FILE>
write messages to mbox file instead of sending them
--reply-to <EMAIL[+]>
email addresses replies should be sent to
-s,--subject <TEXT>
subject of first message (intro or single patch)
--in-reply-to <MSGID>
message identifier to reply to
--flag <FLAG[+]>
flags to add in subject prefixes
-t,--to <EMAIL[+]>
email addresses of recipients
-e,--ssh <CMD>
specify ssh command to use
--remotecmd <CMD>
specify hg command to run on the remote side
--insecure
do not verify server certificate (ignoring web.cacerts
config)
[+] marked option can be specified multiple times
phabricator
simple Phabricator integration (EXPERIMENTAL)
This extension provides a phabsend command which sends a stack of
changesets to Phabricator, and a phabread command which prints a
stack of revisions in a format suitable for hg import, and a
phabupdate command to update statuses in batch.
A "phabstatus" view for hg show is also provided; it displays
status information of Phabricator differentials associated with
unfinished changesets.
By default, Phabricator requires Test Plan which might prevent
some changeset from being sent. The requirement could be disabled
by changing differential.require-test-plan-field config server
side.
Config:
[phabricator]
# Phabricator URL
url = https://phab.example.com/
# Repo callsign. If a repo has a URL https://$HOST/diffusion/FOO, then its
# callsign is "FOO".
callsign = FOO
# curl command to use. If not set (default), use builtin HTTP library to
# communicate. If set, use the specified curl command. This could be useful
# if you need to specify advanced options that is not easily supported by
# the internal library.
curlcmd = curl --connect-timeout 2 --retry 3 --silent
# retry failed command N time (default 0). Useful when using the extension
# over flakly connection.
#
# We wait `retry.interval` between each retry, in seconds.
# (default 1 second).
retry = 3
retry.interval = 10
# the retry option can combine well with the http.timeout one.
#
# For example to give up on http request after 20 seconds:
[http]
timeout=20
[auth]
example.schemes = https
example.prefix = phab.example.com
# API token. Get it from https://$HOST/conduit/login/
example.phabtoken = cli-xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Commands
Change import/export
phabimport
import patches from Phabricator for the specified Differential
Revisions:
hg phabimport DREVSPEC... [OPTIONS]
The patches are read and applied starting at the parent of the
working directory.
See hg help phabread for how to specify DREVSPEC.
Options:
--stack
import dependencies as well
--test-vcr <VALUE>
Path to a vcr file. If nonexistent, will record a new vcr
transcript, otherwise will mock all http requests using
the specified vcr file. (ADVANCED)
phabread
print patches from Phabricator suitable for importing:
hg phabread DREVSPEC... [OPTIONS]
DREVSPEC could be a Differential Revision identity, like D123, or
just the number 123. It could also have common operators like +,
-, &, (, ) for complex queries. Prefix : could be used to select
a stack. If multiple DREVSPEC values are given, the result is
the union of each individually evaluated value. No attempt is
currently made to reorder the values to run from parent to child.
abandoned, accepted, closed, needsreview, needsrevision could be
used to filter patches by status. For performance reason, they
only represent a subset of non-status selections and cannot be
used alone.
For example, :D6+8-(2+D4) selects a stack up to D6, plus D8 and
exclude D2 and D4. :D9 & needsreview selects "Needs Review"
revisions in a stack up to D9.
If --stack is given, follow dependencies information and read all
patches. It is equivalent to the : operator.
Options:
--stack
read dependencies
--test-vcr <VALUE>
Path to a vcr file. If nonexistent, will record a new vcr
transcript, otherwise will mock all http requests using
the specified vcr file. (ADVANCED)
phabsend
upload changesets to Phabricator:
hg phabsend REV [OPTIONS]
If there are multiple revisions specified, they will be send as a
stack with a linear dependencies relationship using the order
specified by the revset.
For the first time uploading changesets, local tags will be
created to maintain the association. After the first time,
phabsend will check obsstore and tags information so it can
figure out whether to update an existing Differential Revision,
or create a new one.
If --amend is set, update commit messages so they have the
Differential Revision URL, remove related tags. This is similar
to what arcanist will do, and is more desired in author-push
workflows. Otherwise, use local tags to record the Differential
Revision association.
The --confirm option lets you confirm changesets before sending
them. You can also add following to your configuration file to
make it default behaviour:
[phabsend]
confirm = true
By default, a separate review will be created for each commit
that is selected, and will have the same parent/child
relationship in Phabricator. If --fold is set, multiple commits
are rolled up into a single review as if diffed from the parent
of the first revision to the last. The commit messages are
concatenated in the summary field on Phabricator.
phabsend will check obsstore and the above association to decide
whether to update an existing Differential Revision, or create a
new one.
Options:
-r,--rev <REV[+]>
revisions to send
--amend
update commit messages (default: True)
--reviewer <VALUE[+]>
specify reviewers
--blocker <VALUE[+]>
specify blocking reviewers
-m,--comment <VALUE>
add a comment to Revisions with new/updated Diffs
--confirm
ask for confirmation before sending
--fold combine the revisions into one review
--test-vcr <VALUE>
Path to a vcr file. If nonexistent, will record a new vcr
transcript, otherwise will mock all http requests using
the specified vcr file. (ADVANCED)
[+] marked option can be specified multiple times
phabupdate
update Differential Revision in batch:
hg phabupdate [DREVSPEC...| -r REV...] [OPTIONS]
DREVSPEC selects revisions. See hg help phabread for its usage.
Options:
--accept
accept revisions
--reject
reject revisions
--request-review
request review on revisions
--abandon
abandon revisions
--reclaim
reclaim revisions
--close
close revisions
--reopen
reopen revisions
--plan-changes
plan changes for revisions
--resign
resign as a reviewer from revisions
--commandeer
commandeer revisions
-m,--comment <VALUE>
comment on the last revision
-r,--rev <REV>
local revision to update
--test-vcr <VALUE>
Path to a vcr file. If nonexistent, will record a new vcr
transcript, otherwise will mock all http requests using
the specified vcr file. (ADVANCED)
Uncategorized commands
purge
command to delete untracked files from the working directory
(DEPRECATED)
The functionality of this extension has been included in core
Mercurial since version 5.7. Please use hg purge ... instead. hg
purge --confirm is now the default, unless the extension is
enabled for backward compatibility.
rebase
command to move sets of revisions to a different ancestor
This extension lets you rebase changesets in an existing
Mercurial repository.
For more information:
https://mercurial-scm.org/wiki/RebaseExtension
Commands
Change manipulation
rebase
move changeset (and descendants) to a different branch:
hg rebase [[-s REV]... | [-b REV]... | [-r REV]...] [-d REV] [OPTION]...
Rebase uses repeated merging to graft changesets from one part of
history (the source) onto another (the destination). This can be
useful for linearizing local changes relative to a master
development tree.
Published commits cannot be rebased (see hg help phases). To
copy commits, see hg help graft.
If you don't specify a destination changeset (-d/--dest), rebase
will use the same logic as hg merge to pick a destination. if
the current branch contains exactly one other head, the other
head is merged with by default. Otherwise, an explicit revision
with which to merge with must be provided. (destination
changeset is not modified by rebasing, but new changesets are
added as its descendants.)
Here are the ways to select changesets:
1. Explicitly select them using --rev.
2. Use --source to select a root changeset and include all of
its descendants.
3. Use --base to select a changeset; rebase will find
ancestors and their descendants which are not also
ancestors of the destination.
4. If you do not specify any of --rev, --source, or --base,
rebase will use --base . as above.
If --source or --rev is used, special names SRC and ALLSRC can be
used in --dest. Destination would be calculated per source
revision with SRC substituted by that single source revision and
ALLSRC substituted by all source revisions.
Rebase will destroy original changesets unless you use --keep.
It will also move your bookmarks (even if you do).
Some changesets may be dropped if they do not contribute changes
(e.g. merges from the destination branch).
Unlike merge, rebase will do nothing if you are at the branch tip
of a named branch with two heads. You will need to explicitly
specify source and/or destination.
If you need to use a tool to automate merge/conflict decisions,
you can specify one with --tool, see hg help merge-tools. As a
caveat: the tool will not be used to mediate when a file was
deleted, there is no hook presently available for this.
If a rebase is interrupted to manually resolve a conflict, it can
be continued with --continue/-c, aborted with --abort/-a, or
stopped with --stop.
Examples:
• move "local changes" (current commit back to branching point)
to the current branch tip after a pull:
hg rebase
• move a single changeset to the stable branch:
hg rebase -r 5f493448 -d stable
• splice a commit and all its descendants onto another part of
history:
hg rebase --source c0c3 --dest 4cf9
• rebase everything on a branch marked by a bookmark onto the
default branch:
hg rebase --base myfeature --dest default
• collapse a sequence of changes into a single commit:
hg rebase --collapse -r 1520:1525 -d .
• move a named branch while preserving its name:
hg rebase -r "branch(featureX)" -d 1.3 --keepbranches
• stabilize orphaned changesets so history looks linear:
hg rebase -r 'orphan()-obsolete()' -d 'first(max((successors(max(roots(ALLSRC) & ::SRC)^)-obsolete())::) + max(::((roots(ALLSRC) & ::SRC)^)-obsolete()))'
Configuration Options:
You can make rebase require a destination if you set the
following config option:
[commands]
rebase.requiredest = True
By default, rebase will close the transaction after each commit.
For performance purposes, you can configure rebase to use a
single transaction across the entire rebase. WARNING: This
setting introduces a significant risk of losing the work you've
done in a rebase if the rebase aborts unexpectedly:
[rebase]
singletransaction = True
By default, rebase writes to the working copy, but you can
configure it to run in-memory for better performance. When the
rebase is not moving the parent(s) of the working copy (AKA the
"currently checked out changesets"), this may also allow it to
run even if the working copy is dirty:
[rebase]
experimental.inmemory = True
Return Values:
Returns 0 on success, 1 if nothing to rebase or there are
unresolved conflicts.
Options:
-s,--source <REV[+]>
rebase the specified changesets and their descendants
-b,--base <REV[+]>
rebase everything from branching point of specified
changeset
-r,--rev <REV[+]>
rebase these revisions
-d,--dest <REV>
rebase onto the specified changeset
--collapse
collapse the rebased changesets
-m,--message <TEXT>
use text as collapse commit message
-e, --edit
invoke editor on commit messages
-l,--logfile <FILE>
read collapse commit message from file
-k, --keep
keep original changesets
--keepbranches
keep original branch names
-D, --detach
(DEPRECATED)
-i, --interactive
(DEPRECATED)
-t,--tool <VALUE>
specify merge tool
--stop stop interrupted rebase
-c, --continue
continue an interrupted rebase
-a, --abort
abort an interrupted rebase
--auto-orphans <VALUE>
automatically rebase orphan revisions in the specified
revset (EXPERIMENTAL)
-n, --dry-run
do not perform actions, just print output
-T,--template <TEMPLATE>
display with template
--confirm
ask before applying actions
[+] marked option can be specified multiple times
record
commands to interactively select changes for commit/qrefresh
(DEPRECATED)
The feature provided by this extension has been moved into core
Mercurial as hg commit --interactive.
Commands
Change creation
qrecord
interactively record a new patch:
hg qrecord [OPTION]... PATCH [FILE]...
See hg help qnew & hg help record for more information and usage.
record
interactively select changes to commit:
hg record [OPTION]... [FILE]...
If a list of files is omitted, all changes reported by hg status
will be candidates for recording.
See hg help dates for a list of formats valid for -d/--date.
If using the text interface (see hg help config), you will be
prompted for whether to record changes to each modified file, and
for files with multiple changes, for each change to use. For each
query, the following responses are possible:
y - record this change
n - skip this change
e - edit this change manually
s - skip remaining changes to this file
f - record remaining changes to this file
d - done, skip remaining changes and files
a - record all changes to all remaining files
q - quit, recording no changes
? - display help
This command is not available when committing a merge.
Options:
-A, --addremove
mark new/missing files as added/removed before committing
--close-branch
mark a branch head as closed
--amend
amend the parent of the working directory
-s, --secret
use the secret phase for committing
-e, --edit
invoke editor on commit messages
--force-close-branch
forcibly close branch from a non-head changeset (ADVANCED)
-I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
include names matching the given patterns
-X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
exclude names matching the given patterns
-m,--message <TEXT>
use text as commit message
-l,--logfile <FILE>
read commit message from file
-d,--date <DATE>
record the specified date as commit date
-u,--user <USER>
record the specified user as committer
-S, --subrepos
recurse into subrepositories
-w, --ignore-all-space
ignore white space when comparing lines
-b, --ignore-space-change
ignore changes in the amount of white space
-B, --ignore-blank-lines
ignore changes whose lines are all blank
-Z, --ignore-space-at-eol
ignore changes in whitespace at EOL
[+] marked option can be specified multiple times
releasenotes
generate release notes from commit messages (EXPERIMENTAL)
It is common to maintain files detailing changes in a project
between releases. Maintaining these files can be difficult and
time consuming. The hg releasenotes command provided by this
extension makes the process simpler by automating it.
Commands
Change navigation
releasenotes
parse release notes from commit messages into an output file:
hg releasenotes [-r REV] [-c] FILE
Given an output file and set of revisions, this command will
parse commit messages for release notes then add them to the
output file.
Release notes are defined in commit messages as ReStructuredText
directives. These have the form:
.. directive:: title
content
Each directive maps to an output section in a generated release
notes file, which itself is ReStructuredText. For example, the ..
feature:: directive would map to a New Features section.
Release note directives can be either short-form or long-form. In
short- form, title is omitted and the release note is rendered as
a bullet list. In long form, a sub-section with the title title
is added to the section.
The FILE argument controls the output file to write gathered
release notes to. The format of the file is:
Section 1
=========
...
Section 2
=========
...
Only sections with defined release notes are emitted.
If a section only has short-form notes, it will consist of bullet
list:
Section
=======
* Release note 1
* Release note 2
If a section has long-form notes, sub-sections will be emitted:
Section
=======
Note 1 Title
------------
Description of the first long-form note.
Note 2 Title
------------
Description of the second long-form note.
If the FILE argument points to an existing file, that file will
be parsed for release notes having the format that would be
generated by this command. The notes from the processed commit
messages will be merged into this parsed set.
During release notes merging:
• Duplicate items are automatically ignored
• Items that are different are automatically ignored if the
similarity is greater than a threshold.
This means that the release notes file can be updated
independently from this command and changes should not be lost
when running this command on that file. A particular use case for
this is to tweak the wording of a release note after it has been
added to the release notes file.
The -c/--check option checks the commit message for invalid
admonitions.
The -l/--list option, presents the user with a list of existing
available admonitions along with their title. This also includes
the custom admonitions (if any).
Options:
-r,--rev <REV>
revisions to process for release notes
-c, --check
checks for validity of admonitions (if any)
-l, --list
list the available admonitions with their title
Uncategorized commands
relink
recreates hardlinks between repository clones
Commands
Repository maintenance
relink
recreate hardlinks between two repositories:
hg relink [ORIGIN]
When repositories are cloned locally, their data files will be
hardlinked so that they only use the space of a single
repository.
Unfortunately, subsequent pulls into either repository will break
hardlinks for any files touched by the new changesets, even if
both repositories end up pulling the same changes.
Similarly, passing --rev to "hg clone" will fail to use any
hardlinks, falling back to a complete copy of the source
repository.
This command lets you recreate those hardlinks and reclaim that
wasted space.
This repository will be relinked to share space with ORIGIN,
which must be on the same local disk. If ORIGIN is omitted, looks
for "default-relink", then "default", in [paths].
Do not attempt any read operations on this repository while the
command is running. (Both repositories will be locked against
writes.)
remotefilelog
remotefilelog causes Mercurial to lazilly fetch file contents
(EXPERIMENTAL)
This extension is HIGHLY EXPERIMENTAL. There are NO BACKWARDS
COMPATIBILITY GUARANTEES. This means that repositories created
with this extension may only be usable with the exact version of
this extension/Mercurial that was used. The extension attempts to
enforce this in order to prevent repository corruption.
remotefilelog works by fetching file contents lazily and storing
them in a cache on the client rather than in revlogs. This allows
enormous histories to be transferred only partially, making them
easier to operate on.
Configs:
packs.maxchainlen specifies the maximum delta chain length in
pack files
packs.maxpacksize specifies the maximum pack file size
packs.maxpackfilecount specifies the maximum number of packs
in the
shared cache (trees only for now)
remotefilelog.backgroundprefetch runs prefetch in background
when True
remotefilelog.bgprefetchrevs specifies revisions to fetch on
commit and
update, and on other commands that use them. Different
from pullprefetch.
remotefilelog.gcrepack does garbage collection during repack
when True
remotefilelog.nodettl specifies maximum TTL of a node in
seconds before
it is garbage collected
remotefilelog.repackonhggc runs repack on hg gc when True
remotefilelog.prefetchdays specifies the maximum age of a
commit in
days after which it is no longer prefetched.
remotefilelog.prefetchdelay specifies delay between background
prefetches in seconds after operations that change the
working copy parent
remotefilelog.data.gencountlimit constraints the minimum
number of data
pack files required to be considered part of a
generation. In particular, minimum number of packs
files > gencountlimit.
remotefilelog.data.generations list for specifying the lower
bound of
each generation of the data pack files. For example,
list ['100MB','1MB'] or ['1MB', '100MB'] will lead to
three generations: [0, 1MB), [ 1MB, 100MB) and [100MB,
infinity).
remotefilelog.data.maxrepackpacks the maximum number of pack
files to
include in an incremental data repack.
remotefilelog.data.repackmaxpacksize the maximum size of a
pack file for
it to be considered for an incremental data repack.
remotefilelog.data.repacksizelimit the maximum total size of
pack files
to include in an incremental data repack.
remotefilelog.history.gencountlimit constraints the minimum
number of
history pack files required to be considered part of a
generation. In particular, minimum number of packs
files > gencountlimit.
remotefilelog.history.generations list for specifying the
lower bound of
each generation of the history pack files. For example,
list [ '100MB', '1MB'] or ['1MB', '100MB'] will lead to
three generations: [ 0, 1MB), [1MB, 100MB) and [100MB,
infinity).
remotefilelog.history.maxrepackpacks the maximum number of
pack files to
include in an incremental history repack.
remotefilelog.history.repackmaxpacksize the maximum size of a
pack file
for it to be considered for an incremental history
repack.
remotefilelog.history.repacksizelimit the maximum total size
of pack
files to include in an incremental history repack.
remotefilelog.backgroundrepack automatically consolidate packs
in the
background
remotefilelog.cachepath path to cache
remotefilelog.cachegroup if set, make cache directory sgid to
this
group
remotefilelog.cacheprocess binary to invoke for fetching file
data
remotefilelog.debug turn on remotefilelog-specific debug
output
remotefilelog.excludepattern pattern of files to exclude from
pulls
remotefilelog.includepattern pattern of files to include in
pulls
remotefilelog.fetchwarning: message to print when too many
single-file fetches occur
remotefilelog.getfilesstep number of files to request in a
single RPC
remotefilelog.getfilestype if set to 'threaded' use threads to
fetch
files, otherwise use optimistic fetching
remotefilelog.pullprefetch revset for selecting files that
should be
eagerly downloaded rather than lazily
remotefilelog.reponame name of the repo. If set, used to
partition
data from other repos in a shared store.
remotefilelog.server if true, enable server-side functionality
remotefilelog.servercachepath path for caching blobs on the
server
remotefilelog.serverexpiration number of days to keep cached
server
blobs
remotefilelog.validatecache if set, check cache entries for
corruption
before returning blobs
remotefilelog.validatecachelog if set, check cache entries for
corruption before returning metadata
Commands
Repository maintenance
prefetch
prefetch file revisions from the server:
hg prefetch [OPTIONS] [FILE...]
Prefetchs file revisions for the specified revs and stores them
in the local remotefilelog cache. If no rev is specified, the
default rev is used which is the union of dot, draft,
pullprefetch and bgprefetchrev. File names or patterns can be
used to limit which files are downloaded.
Return 0 on success.
Options:
-r,--rev <REV[+]>
prefetch the specified revisions
--repack
run repack after prefetch
-b,--base <VALUE>
rev that is assumed to already be local
-I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
include names matching the given patterns
-X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
exclude names matching the given patterns
[+] marked option can be specified multiple times
Uncategorized commands
gc
garbage collect the client and server filelog caches:
hg gc [REPO...]
garbage collect the client and server filelog caches
repack
hg repack [OPTIONS]
Options:
--background
run in a background process
--incremental
do an incremental repack
--packsonly
only repack packs (skip loose objects)
verifyremotefilelog
hg verifyremotefilelogs <directory>
Options:
-d, --decompress
decompress the filelogs first
remotenames
showing remotebookmarks and remotebranches in UI
(EXPERIMENTAL)
By default both remotebookmarks and remotebranches are turned on.
Config knob to control the individually are as follows.
Config options to tweak the default behaviour:
remotenames.bookmarks
Boolean value to enable or disable showing of
remotebookmarks (default: True)
remotenames.branches
Boolean value to enable or disable showing of
remotebranches (default: True)
remotenames.hoistedpeer
Name of the peer whose remotebookmarks should be hoisted
into the top-level namespace (default: 'default')
schemes
extend schemes with shortcuts to repository swarms
This extension allows you to specify shortcuts for parent URLs
with a lot of repositories to act like a scheme, for example:
[schemes]
py = http://code.python.org/hg/
After that you can use it like:
hg clone py://trunk/
Additionally there is support for some more complex schemas, for
example used by Google Code:
[schemes]
gcode = http://{1}.googlecode.com/hg/
The syntax is taken from Mercurial templates, and you have
unlimited number of variables, starting with {1} and continuing
with {2}, {3} and so on. This variables will receive parts of URL
supplied, split by /. Anything not specified as {part} will be
just appended to an URL.
For convenience, the extension adds these schemes by default:
[schemes]
py = http://hg.python.org/
bb = https://bitbucket.org/
bb+ssh = ssh://hg@bitbucket.org/
gcode = https://{1}.googlecode.com/hg/
kiln = https://{1}.kilnhg.com/Repo/
You can override a predefined scheme by defining a new scheme
with the same name.
Commands
Uncategorized commands
share
share a common history between several working directories
The share extension introduces a new command hg share to create a
new working directory. This is similar to hg clone, but doesn't
involve copying or linking the storage of the repository. This
allows working on different branches or changes in parallel
without the associated cost in terms of disk space.
Note: destructive operations or extensions like hg rollback
should be used with care as they can result in confusing
problems.
Automatic Pooled Storage for Clones
When this extension is active, hg clone can be configured to
automatically share/pool storage across multiple clones. This
mode effectively converts hg clone to hg clone + hg share. The
benefit of using this mode is the automatic management of store
paths and intelligent pooling of related repositories.
The following share. config options influence this feature:
share.pool
Filesystem path where shared repository data will be
stored. When defined, hg clone will automatically use
shared repository storage instead of creating a store
inside each clone.
share.poolnaming
How directory names in share.pool are constructed.
"identity" means the name is derived from the first
changeset in the repository. In this mode, different
remotes share storage if their root/initial changeset is
identical. In this mode, the local shared repository is an
aggregate of all encountered remote repositories.
"remote" means the name is derived from the source
repository's path or URL. In this mode, storage is only
shared if the path or URL requested in the hg clone
command matches exactly to a repository that was cloned
before.
The default naming mode is "identity".
Sharing requirements and configs of source repository with
shares:
By default creating a shared repository only enables sharing a
common history and does not share requirements and configs
between them. This may lead to problems in some cases, for
example when you upgrade the storage format from one repository
but does not set related configs in the shares.
Setting format.exp-share-safe = True enables sharing configs and
requirements. This only applies to shares which are done after
enabling the config option.
For enabling this in existing shares, enable the config option
and reshare.
For resharing existing shares, make sure your working directory
is clean and there are no untracked files, delete that share and
create a new share.
Commands
Repository creation
share
create a new shared repository:
hg share [-U] [-B] SOURCE [DEST]
Initialize a new repository and working directory that shares its
history (and optionally bookmarks) with another repository.
Note using rollback or extensions that destroy/modify history
(mq, rebase, etc.) can cause considerable confusion with
shared clones. In particular, if two shared clones are
both updated to the same changeset, and one of them
destroys that changeset with rollback, the other clone
will suddenly stop working: all operations will fail with
"abort: working directory has unknown parent". The only
known workaround is to use debugsetparents on the broken
clone to reset it to a changeset that still exists.
Options:
-U, --noupdate
do not create a working directory
-B, --bookmarks
also share bookmarks
--relative
point to source using a relative path
Repository maintenance
unshare
convert a shared repository to a normal one:
hg unshare
Copy the store data to the repo and remove the sharedpath data.
show
unified command to show various repository information
(EXPERIMENTAL)
This extension provides the hg show command, which provides a
central command for displaying commonly-accessed repository data
and views of that data.
The following config options can influence operation.
commands
show.aliasprefix
List of strings that will register aliases for views. e.g.
s will effectively set config options alias.s<view> = show
<view> for all views. i.e. hg swork would execute hg show
work.
Aliases that would conflict with existing registrations
will not be performed.
Commands
Change navigation
show
show various repository information:
hg show VIEW
A requested view of repository data is displayed.
If no view is requested, the list of available views is shown and
the command aborts.
Note There are no backwards compatibility guarantees for the
output of this command. Output may change in any future
Mercurial release.
Consumers wanting stable command output should specify a
template via -T/--template.
List of available views:
bookmarks bookmarks and their associated changeset
stack current line of work
work changesets that aren't finished
Options:
-T,--template <TEMPLATE>
display with template
sparse
allow sparse checkouts of the working directory (EXPERIMENTAL)
(This extension is not yet protected by backwards compatibility
guarantees. Any aspect may break in future releases until this
notice is removed.)
This extension allows the working directory to only consist of a
subset of files for the revision. This allows specific files or
directories to be explicitly included or excluded. Many
repository operations have performance proportional to the number
of files in the working directory. So only realizing a subset of
files in the working directory can improve performance.
Sparse Config Files
The set of files that are part of a sparse checkout are defined
by a sparse config file. The file defines 3 things: includes
(files to include in the sparse checkout), excludes (files to
exclude from the sparse checkout), and profiles (links to other
config files).
The file format is newline delimited. Empty lines and lines
beginning with # are ignored.
Lines beginning with %include `` denote another sparse config
file to include. e.g. ``%include tests.sparse. The filename is
relative to the repository root.
The special lines [include] and [exclude] denote the section for
includes and excludes that follow, respectively. It is illegal to
have [include] after [exclude].
Non-special lines resemble file patterns to be added to either
includes or excludes. The syntax of these lines is documented by
hg help patterns. Patterns are interpreted as glob: by default
and match against the root of the repository.
Exclusion patterns take precedence over inclusion patterns. So
even if a file is explicitly included, an [exclude] entry can
remove it.
For example, say you have a repository with 3 directories,
frontend/, backend/, and tools/. frontend/ and backend/
correspond to different projects and it is uncommon for someone
working on one to need the files for the other. But tools/
contains files shared between both projects. Your sparse config
files may resemble:
# frontend.sparse
frontend/**
tools/**
# backend.sparse
backend/**
tools/**
Say the backend grows in size. Or there's a directory with
thousands of files you wish to exclude. You can modify the
profile to exclude certain files:
[include]
backend/**
tools/**
[exclude]
tools/tests/**
Commands
Uncategorized commands
split
command to split a changeset into smaller ones (EXPERIMENTAL)
Commands
Change manipulation
split
split a changeset into smaller ones:
hg split [--no-rebase] [[-r] REV]
Repeatedly prompt changes and commit message for new changesets
until there is nothing left in the original changeset.
If --rev was not given, split the working directory parent.
By default, rebase connected non-obsoleted descendants onto the
new changeset. Use --no-rebase to avoid the rebase.
Options:
-r,--rev <REV>
revision to split
--rebase
rebase descendants after split (default: True)
-d,--date <DATE>
record the specified date as commit date
-u,--user <USER>
record the specified user as committer
sqlitestore
store repository data in SQLite (EXPERIMENTAL)
The sqlitestore extension enables the storage of repository data
in SQLite.
This extension is HIGHLY EXPERIMENTAL. There are NO BACKWARDS
COMPATIBILITY GUARANTEES. This means that repositories created
with this extension may only be usable with the exact version of
this extension/Mercurial that was used. The extension attempts to
enforce this in order to prevent repository corruption.
In addition, several features are not yet supported or have known
bugs:
• Only some data is stored in SQLite. Changeset, manifest, and
other repository data is not yet stored in SQLite.
• Transactions are not robust. If the process is aborted at the
right time during transaction close/rollback, the repository
could be in an inconsistent state. This problem will diminish
once all repository data is tracked by SQLite.
• Bundle repositories do not work (the ability to use e.g. hg -R
<bundle-file> log to automatically overlay a bundle on top of
the existing repository).
• Various other features don't work.
This extension should work for basic clone/pull, update, and
commit workflows. Some history rewriting operations may fail due
to lack of support for bundle repositories.
To use, activate the extension and set the
storage.new-repo-backend config option to sqlite to enable new
repositories to use SQLite for storage.
strip
strip changesets and their descendants from history (DEPRECATED)
The functionality of this extension has been included in core
Mercurial since version 5.7. Please use hg debugstrip ...
instead.
This extension allows you to strip changesets and all their
descendants from the repository. See the command help for
details.
transplant
command to transplant changesets from another branch
This extension allows you to transplant changes to another parent
revision, possibly in another repository. The transplant is done
using 'diff' patches.
Transplanted patches are recorded in .hg/transplant/transplants,
as a map from a changeset hash to its hash in the source
repository.
Commands
Change manipulation
transplant
transplant changesets from another branch:
hg transplant [-s REPO] [-b BRANCH [-a]] [-p REV] [-m REV] [REV]...
Selected changesets will be applied on top of the current working
directory with the log of the original changeset. The changesets
are copied and will thus appear twice in the history with
different identities.
Consider using the graft command if everything is inside the same
repository - it will use merges and will usually give a better
result. Use the rebase extension if the changesets are
unpublished and you want to move them instead of copying them.
If --log is specified, log messages will have a comment appended
of the form:
(transplanted from CHANGESETHASH)
You can rewrite the changelog message with the --filter option.
Its argument will be invoked with the current changelog message
as $1 and the patch as $2.
--source/-s specifies another repository to use for selecting
changesets, just as if it temporarily had been pulled. If
--branch/-b is specified, these revisions will be used as heads
when deciding which changesets to transplant, just as if only
these revisions had been pulled. If --all/-a is specified, all
the revisions up to the heads specified with --branch will be
transplanted.
Example:
• transplant all changes up to REV on top of your current
revision:
hg transplant --branch REV --all
You can optionally mark selected transplanted changesets as merge
changesets. You will not be prompted to transplant any ancestors
of a merged transplant, and you can merge descendants of them
normally instead of transplanting them.
Merge changesets may be transplanted directly by specifying the
proper parent changeset by calling hg transplant --parent.
If no merges or revisions are provided, hg transplant will start
an interactive changeset browser.
If a changeset application fails, you can fix the merge by hand
and then resume where you left off by calling hg transplant
--continue/-c.
Options:
-s,--source <REPO>
transplant changesets from REPO
-b,--branch <REV[+]>
use this source changeset as head
-a, --all
pull all changesets up to the --branch revisions
-p,--prune <REV[+]>
skip over REV
-m,--merge <REV[+]>
merge at REV
--parent <REV>
parent to choose when transplanting merge
-e, --edit
invoke editor on commit messages
--log append transplant info to log message
--stop stop interrupted transplant
-c, --continue
continue last transplant session after fixing conflicts
--filter <CMD>
filter changesets through command
[+] marked option can be specified multiple times
uncommit
uncommit part or all of a local changeset (EXPERIMENTAL)
This command undoes the effect of a local commit, returning the
affected files to their uncommitted state. This means that files
modified, added or removed in the changeset will be left
unchanged, and so will remain modified, added and removed in the
working directory.
Commands
Change manipulation
unamend
undo the most recent amend operation on a current changeset:
hg unamend
This command will roll back to the previous version of a
changeset, leaving working directory in state in which it was
before running hg amend (e.g. files modified as part of an amend
will be marked as modified hg status)
uncommit
uncommit part or all of a local changeset:
hg uncommit [OPTION]... [FILE]...
This command undoes the effect of a local commit, returning the
affected files to their uncommitted state. This means that files
modified or deleted in the changeset will be left unchanged, and
so will remain modified in the working directory.
If no files are specified, the commit will be pruned, unless
--keep is given.
Options:
--keep allow an empty commit after uncommitting
--allow-dirty-working-copy
allow uncommit with outstanding changes
-n,--note <TEXT>
store a note on uncommit
-I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
include names matching the given patterns
-X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
exclude names matching the given patterns
-m,--message <TEXT>
use text as commit message
-l,--logfile <FILE>
read commit message from file
-d,--date <DATE>
record the specified date as commit date
-u,--user <USER>
record the specified user as committer
-D, --currentdate
record the current date as commit date
-U, --currentuser
record the current user as committer
[+] marked option can be specified multiple times
win32mbcs
allow the use of MBCS paths with problematic encodings
Some MBCS encodings are not good for some path operations (i.e.
splitting path, case conversion, etc.) with its encoded bytes. We
call such a encoding (i.e. shift_jis and big5) as "problematic
encoding". This extension can be used to fix the issue with
those encodings by wrapping some functions to convert to Unicode
string before path operation.
This extension is useful for:
• Japanese Windows users using shift_jis encoding.
• Chinese Windows users using big5 encoding.
• All users who use a repository with one of problematic
encodings on case-insensitive file system.
This extension is not needed for:
• Any user who use only ASCII chars in path.
• Any user who do not use any of problematic encodings.
Note that there are some limitations on using this extension:
• You should use single encoding in one repository.
• If the repository path ends with 0x5c, .hg/hgrc cannot be read.
• win32mbcs is not compatible with fixutf8 extension.
By default, win32mbcs uses encoding.encoding decided by
Mercurial. You can specify the encoding by config option:
[win32mbcs]
encoding = sjis
It is useful for the users who want to commit with UTF-8 log
message.
win32text
perform automatic newline conversion (DEPRECATED)
Deprecation: The win32text extension requires each user to
configure the extension again and again for each clone since
the configuration is not copied when cloning.
We have therefore made the eol as an alternative. The eol uses
a version controlled file for its configuration and each clone
will therefore use the right settings from the start.
To perform automatic newline conversion, use:
[extensions]
win32text =
[encode]
** = cleverencode:
# or ** = macencode:
[decode]
** = cleverdecode:
# or ** = macdecode:
If not doing conversion, to make sure you do not commit CRLF/CR
by accident:
[hooks]
pretxncommit.crlf = python:hgext.win32text.forbidcrlf
# or pretxncommit.cr = python:hgext.win32text.forbidcr
To do the same check on a server to prevent CRLF/CR from being
pushed or pulled:
[hooks]
pretxnchangegroup.crlf = python:hgext.win32text.forbidcrlf
# or pretxnchangegroup.cr = python:hgext.win32text.forbidcr
zeroconf
discover and advertise repositories on the local network
The zeroconf extension will advertise hg serve instances over
DNS-SD so that they can be discovered using the hg paths command
without knowing the server's IP address.
To allow other people to discover your repository using run hg
serve in your repository:
$ cd test
$ hg serve
You can discover Zeroconf-enabled repositories by running hg
paths:
$ hg paths
zc-test = http://example.com:8000/test
/etc/mercurial/hgrc, $HOME/.hgrc, .hg/hgrc
This file contains defaults and configuration. Values in
.hg/hgrc override those in $HOME/.hgrc, and these override
settings made in the global /etc/mercurial/hgrc
configuration. See hgrc(5) for details of the contents
and format of these files.
.hgignore
This file contains regular expressions (one per line) that
describe file names that should be ignored by hg. For
details, see hgignore(5).
.hgsub
This file defines the locations of all subrepositories,
and tells where the subrepository checkouts came from. For
details, see hg help subrepos.
.hgsubstate
This file is where Mercurial stores all nested repository
states. NB: This file should not be edited manually.
.hgtags
This file contains changeset hash values and text tag
names (one of each separated by spaces) that correspond to
tagged versions of the repository contents. The file
content is encoded using UTF-8.
.hg/last-message.txt
This file is used by hg commit to store a backup of the
commit message in case the commit fails.
.hg/localtags
This file can be used to define local tags which are not
shared among repositories. The file format is the same as
for .hgtags, but it is encoded using the local system
encoding.
Some commands (e.g. revert) produce backup files ending in .orig,
if the .orig file already exists and is not tracked by Mercurial,
it will be overwritten.
Probably lots, please post them to the mailing list (see
Resources below) when you find them.
hgignore(5), hgrc(5)
Written by Olivia Mackall <olivia@selenic.com>
Main Web Site: https://mercurial-scm.org/
Source code repository: https://www.mercurial-scm.org/repo/hg
Mailing list:
https://www.mercurial-scm.org/mailman/listinfo/mercurial/
Copyright (C) 2005-2022 Olivia Mackall. Free use of this
software is granted under the terms of the GNU General Public
License version 2 or any later version.
Olivia Mackall <olivia@selenic.com>
Organization: Mercurial
This page is part of the hg (Mercurial source code management
system) project. Information about the project can be found at
⟨http://mercurial.selenic.com/⟩. If you have a bug report for
this manual page, see
⟨http://mercurial.selenic.com/wiki/BugTracker⟩. This page was
obtained from the project's upstream Mercurial repository
⟨http://selenic.com/hg⟩ on 2024-06-14. (At that time, the date
of the most recent commit that was found in the repository was
2024-04-26.) If you discover any rendering problems in this HTML
version of the page, or you believe there is a better or more up-
to-date source for the page, or you have corrections or
improvements to the information in this COLOPHON (which is not
part of the original manual page), send a mail to
man-pages@man7.org
HG(1)
Pages that refer to this page: hgignore(5), hgrc(5), hg-ssh(8)
|
HTML rendering created 2024-06-26 by Michael Kerrisk, author of The Linux Programming Interface. For details of in-depth Linux/UNIX system programming training courses that I teach, look here. Hosting by jambit GmbH. |
|